The URL can be used to link to this page

17C-227 (7) 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16781 CABLE TELEVISION 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Device box. B. Provided space on backboard for cable company connection. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of the local cable utility. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLETS A. Provide outlet box and plate with cable jack. 2.2 WIRE A. Install cable, furnished by the cable utility, complete from each outlet back to the utility connection point. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION A. Location of outlets shall be verified with Architect and owner prior to roughing. END OF SECTION �,, 16781 - 1 �s 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16740 PP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Device box. B. Provided space on backboard for telephone connection. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NEC. ! " 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLETS A. Provide outlet box and telephone cable to utility connection point. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION A. Location of outlets shall be verified with Architect and Owner prior to roughing. END OF SECTION 16740 - 1 ... 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 termination and in each junction box. B. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white. C. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. D. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of other sections. .. B. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. END OF SECTION .m 16721 - 4 on 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 2.4 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in other sections. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install manual station with operating handle 44 inches above floor. Install audible and visual signal devices 90 inches above floor. C. Use 14 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit. D. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit. E. Make conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, as required. F. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of other sections. B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72H and local fire department requirements. 3 . 3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of other sections. B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing. 3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor 16721 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 2 PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Simplex, Model 2001 series. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements. 2.2 MAIN PANEL A. A main fire alarm panel shall be furnished and installed. New panel type shall be Simplex #2001-8001 and shall include but not be limited to the following modules: 1. Control Power Supply and Charger: Shall keep batteries fully charged and monitor battery status. Unit shall provide a trouble indication for any abnormal condition of the batteries or charging unit. Size as required. 2. Batteries shall be non-maintenance type. Ampere hour rating shall be as required for 60 hours of operation without power followed by a 10 minute alarm condition. Provide a separate enclosure and wiring if required. 2.3 DEVICES A. Smoke Detector 2098-9201 with 9637 base. Photo electric detector. Quantity as required. B. Heat Detectors: 2098-9450 130° Rate of Rise, 2098-9452 194° Fixed. Quantity as required. C. Audio/Visual Unit 4903-9101 unit with white lens engraved "FIRE" and 2901-9838 horn. Semi-recessed mount. Quantity as required. D. Other Devices: Furnish any other device required by the manufacturer for a complete system. 16721 - 2 P" 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS ,�. 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Smoke and heat detectors. B. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. C. Fire alarm panel. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. "" B. NFPA 72 - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Protective Signaling Systems. C. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors. D. NFPA 72G - Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems. E. NFPA 72H - Guide for Test Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. e . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end-of-line devices. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 16721 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Install specified lamps in each luminaire and emergency lighting unit. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3 .4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust Work under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings. C. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean Work under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and .. deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3 .6 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of other sections. 3 .7 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Drawings. END OF SECTION 16510 - 4 PW 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 5. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electromagnetic ballast, energy saving type to match lamps, with Class A sound rating. 6. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified. 7. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 8. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. - 2.3 LAMPS A. Incandescent lamps shall be rated 120 VAC and of type and wattage specified. 4'" B. Provide lamp type specified for luminaire. C. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires. B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance .with manufacturers instructions. B. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. C. Install wall mounted luminaires and emergency lighting units at height as indicated on Drawings. OR D. Coordinate the installation of the fan/light combination with the mechanical contractor. E. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building 4n wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. 16510 - 3 .w ON 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 ow C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. Am D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire. 1. 6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Requirements. C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. 2.2 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Advance. 2. General Electric. 3. Universal. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. 16510 - 2 op 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Ballasts. D. Lamps. E. Luminaire accessories. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15890 - Ductwork B. Section 15985 - Sequence of Operation 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High- " Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. u D. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. 16510 - 1 Re 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16420 - SERVICE ENTRANCE 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED A. Arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service including payment of. Utility Company charges for service. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Voltage: 120/240 volts, single phase, three-wire, 60 Hertz. B. Service Entrance: Existing underground from utility's pad mount transformer. C. Service Size as indicated on Panel Schedule. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify that service entrance is in accordance with Utility Company's rules and regulations. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. END OF SECTION 16420 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 3 PART 3 EXECUTION so 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. C. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated. +* END OF SECTION . e 16180 - 2 V" 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16180 pa _ EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of other sections. ON B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. C. Determine connection locations and requirements. D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. 16180 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment grounding conductors. " B. Bonding. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Existing metal underground water pipe. B. Ground rod. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. ' 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, green insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. END OF SECTION 16170 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. ..� I. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under other sections to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on Drawings. Refer to Electrical Legend for mounting heights. Confirm locations with Architectural plans. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 3. 6 ADJUSTING w A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. END OF SECTION 16141 - 4 4" 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. 1. Arrow Hart, Model 4501. 2. Hubbell, Model CWP26H. 3. Leviton, Model 4990. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 .1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions under provisions of other sections. B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3 .2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3 .3 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. ! ? D. Do not share neutral conductors between different circuits. so E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top bottom. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 16141 - 3 ... 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 WALL SWITCHES A. Single Pole Switch: 1. Arrow Hart, Model 1991. 2. Hubbell, Model 1221. 3. Leviton, Model 1121. B. Three-way Switch: 1. Arrow Hart, Model 1993. 2. Hubbell, Model 1223. 3. Leviton, Model 1123. C. Four-way Switch: 1. Arrow Hart, Model 1994. 2. Hubbell, Model 1224. 3. Leviton, Model 1124. *■* D. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. E. Device body: White plastic with toggle handle. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Arrow Hart, Model 5262. 2. Hubbell, Model 5262. 3. Leviton, Model 5262. B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Arrow Hart, Model GF5242. 2. Hubbell, Model GF5262. 3. Leviton, Model 6598. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. D. Device Body: White plastic. ,. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: White smooth thermoplastic. 1. Arrow Hart, Model 8240. 2. Hubbell, Model P. 3. Leviton, Model 80700. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. 16141 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES 1 PART 1 GENERAL ±�w 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES . A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. 1W B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by. product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. 2. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, operation and installation of product. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 16141 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch (150 mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls. I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. 40 L. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. %V M. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. N. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. 3 .2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for products furnished under other sections. B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with other sections. C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes. _ E. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closure in unused box opening. END OF SECTION 16130 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location *■ required for box to serve intended purpose. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for .. weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. 2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and. junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of the General Requirements. F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other. G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas. �^ 16130 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16130 BOXES 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) . 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. " B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. 16130 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended .w values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. , END OF SECTION R» 16123 - 4 W 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. E. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. F. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. G. Protect exposed cable from damage. H. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. I. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. J. Make splices,taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. K. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor. splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of other sections. B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. 3 .5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. 16123 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 ow 1.6 COORDINATION ow A. Coordinate Work under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. om 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW. 2.2 NON METALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type NM. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. , 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3.2 WIRING METHODS ow A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only Type NM cable. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in surface metal raceways. 16123 - 2 �r 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16123 op BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. C. Non metallic - sheathed cable. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS 1W A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. ' 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. Aluminum wire shall not be substituted for copper unless otherwise noted. C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. PP 16123 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS NOW A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. in B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS sm Not Used 3 PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 16010 - 2 s�• 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers No. 1W173 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. *� B. - Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Sections: 1. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices. 2 . Section 16510 - Interior Luminaires. 3. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Equipment. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittals. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable Building Code for Commonwealth of Massachusetts. B. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70. C. Fire Alarm: Conform to NFPA 101. D. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. 16010 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 HEATING WATER ZONE CONTROL A. On outside temperatures below 65 degrees F, heating pump is activated. B. Once circulator is activated, boiler will heat water at maximum 180 degrees F at outdoor temperature of -20 degrees F and minimum 130 degrees F at outdoor temperature of 60 degrees F, with straight line- relationship between. C. If all zones are satisfied, boiler shuts off. D. On outside temperatures above 65 degrees F, de-energize heating pumps. E. Provide switch to shut off boiler and gas valve outside boiler room and smoke detector in boiler room per Massachusetts code. 3.2 RADIATION A. Single temperature thermostat set at 65 degrees F maintains constant zone temperature by opening and closing two-way control heating valve. 3.3 EXHAUST FAN CONTROL A. Toilet room exhaust fan/light shall operate when the toilet room light switch is turned on. END OF SECTION 15985 - 2 PF 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15985 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Baseboard Radiation. B. Combustion air/boiler room ventilation. C. Exhaust fan control. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15835 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units. B. Section 15870 - Power Ventilators. C. Section 15973 - Electronic Control Systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other Sections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Submit diagrams indicating mechanical system controlled and control system components-. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used 15985 - 1 ww 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage. C. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage. D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short PW couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. E. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. F. Install gages in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. END OF SECTION mew 15980 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 C. Neptune. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.2 PRESSURE GAGES A. ASME B40. 1, 4-1/2 inch diameter drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background, one percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated in psi. 2.3 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psig. B. Needle Valve: Brass for maximum 150 psig. 2.4 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear glass or polycarbonate window, brass stem, 2 percent of scale accuracy to ASTM E77 scale calibrated in degrees F 2.5 DIAL THERMOMETERS A. ASTM E1, 3 inch diameter dial in stainless steel case, bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer hermetically sealed glass lens, stainless steel stem, one percent of full scale accuracy, calibrated in degrees F 2.6 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain. B. Flange: 3 inch (75 mm) outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem. 15980 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15980 INSTRUMENTATION 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps. B. Thermometers and thermometer wells. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15515 - Hydronic Piping. 1.3 REFERENCES �s A. ASME B40. 1 - Gages - Pressure Indicating Dial Type -Elastic Element. B. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gages for Fire and Protection Services. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include list which indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under 'construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ashcroft. B. Liquidometer. 15980 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 D. Provide conduit and electrical wiring where required. Refer to Division 16. ` E. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final . , adjustments of controls. F. Test electronic control systems to assure proper sequencing. Check calibration of instruments. Recalibrate or replace. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. .. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including * sequence of operation after Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 15973 - 4 go 4W 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 on Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 C. Outdoor Reset Thermostat: Remote bulb or bimetal rod and •" tube type, for proportioning action with adjustable throttling range; scale range of -20 to 70 degrees F with adjustable setpoint. O 2.3 CONTROL VALVES go A. Globe Pattern: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, screwed ends. B. Hydronic Systems: 1. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F. 2. Replaceable plugs and seats of brass. ,. 3. Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 4. Two way valves shall have equal percentage �. characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. 2.4 WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS ..t A. Operate on adjustable differential over adjustable temperature range and suitable for operating control valve provided. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check and verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate room thermostats 60 inches above floor or as indicated on the Architectural plans. C. Provide guards on all thermostats. W 15973 - 3 me 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 MW B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. "w 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING o. A. Sequence and schedule work under the provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. .W 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of automatic controls system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Honeywell Inc. B. Johnson Control Inc. C. Barber-Coleman Co. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.2 THERMOSTATS A. Electronic Room Thermostats: Low voltage (24V) , adjustable type, single setpoint, containing single bimetallic element. Minimum 10 degrees F setpoint adjustment, with setback/setup temperature control. Provide covers with setpoint indication with thermometer. ^� B. Room Thermostat Accessories: 1. Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum. .., 2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for device. 4. Thermostat Guards: Locking metal screen mounted on separate base. 15973 - 2 ea. 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15973 ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermostats. B. Control valves. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15515 - Hydronic Piping. B. Section 15835 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. B. NEMA DC 3 - Low-Voltage Room Thermostats. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide electronic automatic temperature control systems with electric accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified or intended. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 15973 - 1 I 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 40 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round go duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. 40 H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION * A. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. B. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 40 3.2 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL a. Exhaust Aluminum END OF SECTION .s 40 15890 - 3 ■■ N am 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 Am 2.2 MATERIALS s A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. D. Sealant: Caulk all ductwork joints, connections, and seams during fabrication with "Hard Cast" to provide an air tight system. E. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. .� E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. 15890 - 2 4. 40 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ducts. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. �.. B. Section 15870 - Power Ventilators. C. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.3 REFERENCES �. A. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Airsan. B. Ventlok. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 15890 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 occur over units, divide element into equal segments centered under each window. Install end caps where units butt against walls. C. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. D. Provide hydronic units with shut-off valve on supply and lockshield balancing valve on return piping. 3.3 CLEANING .w A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. 40 C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory- finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. 4W 3.4 BASEBOARD SCHEDULE A. As scheduled on the plans. so END OF SECTION +�w 15835 - 3 40 ma 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 B. Vulcan Radiator Corporation. C. Runtal North American Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.2 BASEBOARD RADIATION A. Heating Elements: 3/4 inch ID copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins, one tube end belled. ..� B. Enclosure: Minimum 22 gage steel with 7 inch high back and top of one piece; front panel, end panel, end caps, corners, and joiner pieces to snap together, with front panel easily removable. Provide full length damper. C. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as selected .. on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet. D. Element Brackets: 18 gage galvanized steel to support from panel and noise free element cradle. E. Capacity: Based on 65 degree F entering air temperature, 170 degree F average water temperature. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION w* 3. 1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing .�. surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION MN A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate baseboard radiation on outside walls and run cover continuously wall-to-wall unless otherwise indicated. Center elements under windows. Where multiple windows 15835 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 ON Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15835 04 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Baseboard Radiation. * 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. B. Section 15973 - Electronic Controls Systems. C. Section 15985 - Sequence of Operations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation recommendations under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, in this Section with minimum three years "" experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 00 A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS BASEBOARD RADIATION A. Sterling Heating Equipment. ,■ 15835 - 1 MW 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 event of ignition pilot and main flame failure with manual reset. 2.6 PERFORMANCE A. Performance rating shall be in accordance with HI -Testing and Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating Boilers. B. Provide 1 boilers each with gross input 105, 000 Btu/hr, gross output 80,000 Btu/hr at 15 psi working pressure. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fill-Trol System: To include compression tank, fill and check valve, automatic air vent and fittings. w 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 16180. C. Provide connection of gas service in accordance with ANSI/AGA Z223.1. 4W D. Pipe relief valves 6 inches above finished floor. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 4'" A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 4" END OF SECTION 15556 - 5 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 2.4 HOT WATER BOILER TRIM A. Combination water pressure and temperature gage, and ASME rated pressure relief valve. B. Low water cut-off with manual reset to automatically prevent burner operation when boiler water falls below safe level. C. Operating temperature controller with outdoor reset to maintain boiler water temperature. D. Electronic operating temperature controller with full cover for wall mounting, ambient temperature range - 30 to 150 degrees F, adjustable reset ratio of outside air temperature change to discharge control point change 1:2 to 100:1, integral set point adjustment 80 to 230 degrees F, electronic primary and outdoor sensors, for on-off switching of pilot duty single throw double pole relays. E. High limit temperature controller for burner to prevent boiler water temperature from exceeding safe system temperature. F. Boiler air vent. 2.5 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM A. Burner Operation: On-off with low fire position for ignition. B. Gas Burner: Forced draft type for natural gas adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off. C. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent opening of gas valve " until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open. D. Controls: Pre-wired, factory assembled electronic controls in control cabinet with flame scanner or detector, programming control, relays, and switches. Provide pre- purge and post-purge ignition and shut-down of burner in 15556 - 4 so ew 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 40 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Warranty: Include coverage for cast iron boiler sections. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Weil - McLain. B. H.B. Smith. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hot water boilers suitable for forced draft insulated jacket, sectional cast iron heat exchanger, gas burning system, refractory, controls, and boiler trim. B. For forced draft firing, provide water wall design consisting of water backed combustion area with water circulating around firebox. Refractory chamber or separate 40 base not required. C. Boiler venting material shall be Plexco Plexvent, hart and Cooley Ultravent or AL29-4C Stainless steel, combustion air material shall be galvanized steel or 3 inch PVC as recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Assemble from cast iron sections with 30 psig ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Rating. B. Provide clean-out and access doors, observation ports, and relief openings to flue passages. C. Provide structural base of aluminized steel lined with high temperature mineral fiber insulating panels. D. Provide glass fiber insulated steel jacket, finished with factory applied baked enamel. 15556 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. no B. Submit product data indicating general layout, dimensions, and size and location of connections. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE MW A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for internal wiring of factory M* wired equipment. B. Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC4, SEC 8D and ANSI/AGA Z21. 13 and ANSI/UL 726 for boiler construction. C. Units: AGA certified and UL labelled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. C. Protect units before, during, and after installation from damage to casing by leaving factory shipping packaging in place until immediately prior to final acceptance. 15556 - 2 me 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15556 40 CAST IRON BOILERS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Boilers. B. Controls and boiler trim. .. C. Hot water connections. D. Fuel connection. 40 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 15973 - Electronic Control Systems. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. B. Section 15973 - Electronic Control Systems. C. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/AGA Z21. 13 - Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers. B. ANSI/AGA Z223. 1 - National Fuel Gas Code. C. ANSI/ASME SEC4 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers. D. ANSI/ASME SECBD - Boilers and Pressure Vessel Codes -Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels. E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. HI (Hydronics Institute) - Testing and Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating Boilers. 15556 - 1 40 i - 16 North Maple Street Renovation - March, 1992 .. Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. C. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for test specimens. END OF SECTION 40 ww �w 15545 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 B. Closed System Treatment (Water) : 1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust Ph; polyphosphate. 2. Corrosion inhibitors; liquid boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole, low molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or .� sulphite. 3. Conductivity enhancers; phosphates or phosphonates. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 .1 PREPARATION A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. 3.2 CLEANING SEQUENCE A. Add cleaner to closed systems at concentration as recommended by manufacturer. B. Hot Water Heating Systems: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. Remove heat and circulate to 100 �. degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed. C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Architect/Engineer. D. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required. 3.3 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Install around globe valve downstream of circulating pumps unless ,. indicated otherwise. 15545 - 2 No air 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15545 CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT • 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of piping systems. B. Treatment for closed systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable EPA code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for delivery to public sewage systems. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Staab Associates. B. Illinois Water Treatment Company. ! * C. Aqua-Chem. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General „ Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. System Cleaner: 1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products; sodium tripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate. 2. Algaecide; . chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides such as quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate) , or isothiazolones. 15545 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat viton fitted, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. G.- Drive: Flexible coupling. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve combination pump discharge valve on pump discharge. E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. 40 F. Lubricate pumps before start-up. 3 .2 PUMP SCHEDULE W A. As scheduled on the plans. END OF SECTION 15540 - 3 A 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bell and Gossett. B. Taco Inc. " C. Weil Pump Company. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2 .2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically. B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. Refer to Section 15170. D. Pump Connections: Flanged. 2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for in-line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psig maximum working pressure. B. Casing: Cast iron. C. Impeller: Cadmium plated steel, Brass or bronze, keyed to shaft. D. Bearings: Two, oil lubricated bronze sleeves. E. Shaft: Alloy Stainless steel with copper stainless steel sleeve, integral thrust collar. 15540 - 2 Am 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15540 HVAC PUMPS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. In-line circulators. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. B. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps with minimum three years experience. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's ± • recommendations under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of , r Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 15540 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 C. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. D. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank, refer to ► Section 15556 - Cast Iron Boilers. E. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of centrifugal pumps where indicated. F. Provide ball valves with balancing valves on water outlet from terminal heating units, refer to Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. G. Provide relief valves on expansion tanks. H. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. I. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. END OF SECTION MW 15515 - 5 40 ■W AD 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 4M 2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES A. Bell and Gossett. .o B. Taco. Mft C. Amtrol Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General am Requirements. 2.8 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES A. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psig operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring-loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation. 2.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RELIEF VALVES. A. Bell and Gossett. B. Taco. C. Amtrol Inc. • D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 4ft 2. 10 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. 15515 - 4 ON 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 e! 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR VENTS A. Bell and Gossett. B. Dole. 40 C. Maid of Mist. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.4 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR SEPARATORS A. Bell and Gossett. B. Taco. C. Amtrol Inc. " D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.6 AIR SEPARATORS A. Dip Tube Fitting: For 125 psig operating pressure; to prevent free air collected in boiler from rising into system. B. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code; for 125 psig operating pressure. C. Air Elimination Valve: Bronze, float operated, for 125 psig operating pressure. D. Size: As recommended by the manufacturer, refer to Section 15556 - Cast Iron Boilers. 15515 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products,store and protect products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - EXPANSION TANKS . A. Bell and Gossett. B. Taco Inc. C. Amtrol Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.2 EXPANSION TANKS A. Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code; 125 psi rating; cleaned, prime coated, and supplied with steel support saddles; with tappings for installation of accessories. B. Gage Glass Set: Brass compression stops, guard, and 3/4 inch red line glass, maximum 24 inches length, long enough to cover tank for 2 inches above bottom to 2 inches below top. C. Quick Connect Air Inlet: Automotive tire valve type, ' manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve. D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Gate or Ball valves, strainer, pressure reducing valve, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass around pressure reducing valve. E. Hot Water Heating System: Set expansion tank pressure relief valve at 15 psi maximum and pressure reducing valve at 12 psi. F. Size: As recommended by the manufacturer, refer to section 15556 - Cast Iron Boilers. 15515 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15515 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES !! 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Expansion tanks. B. Air vents. C. Air separators. D. Strainers. E. Combination fittings. F. Relief valves. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping. B. Section 15545 - Pipe cleaning. 1. 3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1. 6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions, assembly views, and replacement parts list under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 15515 - 1 4W 40 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 AM G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. .. H. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. C. Install gate and ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. �** D. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. E. Provide 3/4 inch gate or ball drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest drain. END OF SECTION 15510 - 4 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 +�w C. Lunkinheimer Company. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.7 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze or stainless steel] one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 . 1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends, remove burrs, bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 15545. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with the General Contractor. 15510 - 3 am Am 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 am 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS O. 2.1 HEATING WATER PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass of ANSI/ASME 4W B16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2 .2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. „ 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated " steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GATE VALVES A. Jenkin Brothers. B. Crane Company. C. Lunkinheimer Company. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 2 .5 GATE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALL VALVES A. Jenkin Brothers. B. Crane Company. 15510 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15510 HYDRONIC PIPING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Heating water piping system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. C. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. D. Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps. E. Section 15545 - Chemical (Water) Treatment. F. Section 15835 - Terminal Heat Transfer Equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. C. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 15510 - 1 ON 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 G. Servicing: Slide-away coupling consisting of discharge elbows secure to sump floor, movable bracket, guide pipe system, lifting chain and chain hooks. H. Controls: Integral diaphragm type level control with separate liquid level control high level alarm. I. Sump: Steel cover plate 30" min. depth and 24" min. diameter single istallation with steel curb frame for .A grouting into concrete sump with inspection opening and cover, and alarm fittings. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA, NSF, ANSI/NFPA 54, UL requirements. �* B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping and electrical work to achieve operating system. .� END OF SECTION 15450 - 4 ON No 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 OR 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS to 2.1 RESIDENTIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATER A. Manufacturers: 'f" 1. Rheem, Model 44V40-2. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. No a. Sepco. b. State Water Heaters. B. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel with single flue passage, flue baffle and draft hood; thermally +o insulated with glass fiber and encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield and legs. 00 2 .2 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE EJECTOR A. Manufacturers: 1 Weil Pumps, Model 3-241204-1\2 2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Aurora Pumps b. The Gorman-Rupp Co. B. Performance: 1 Flow: 20 gal/min at 20 feet of head 2 Motor: 1/2 hp, 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 3 Type: Completely submersible vertical centrifical. C. Casing: Cast Iron pump body and oil filled motor chamber. D. Impeller: Cast Iron, open non-clog stainless steel �. shaft. E. Bearings: Permanently sealed, grease lubricated ball type. F. Accessories: Oil resistant 6 foot cord and plug with three-prong connector for connection to electric wiring system including grounding connector. 15450 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Massachusetts. B. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA) . 2 . National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) . 3 . American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) . 4. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) . 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) . 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA, NSF, NBBPVI, ANSI/NFPA 54, ANSI/NFPA 58, ANSI/NFPA 70, ANSI/UL 174, ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters. 15450 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. B. Sewage Ejector. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. B. ANSI/NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) . 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains. C. Product Data: 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 15450 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. END OF SECTION 15440 - 4 er 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 w 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 REFER TO SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS '"" 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3 .2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with 00 minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3. 3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver, stops, reducers, and escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. +� E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. w F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Division 7, color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 15440 - 3 ww 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 G. ANSI/ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals (Dimensional Standards) . M 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General �* Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide catalogue illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1. 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Confirm that countertops have adequate provision for the installation of countertop lavatories and sinks. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide a manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 15440 - 2 4" 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 ae SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. C. Sinks. D. Showers. E. Bathtubs. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. C. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties. D. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A112.6. 1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures. B. ASME A112.18. 1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. C. ANSI/ASME A112.19. 1 - Enameled. Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. D. ANSI/ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. E. ANSI/ASME A112. 19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use) . F. ANSI/ASME A112. 19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 15440 - 1 4W aft fto 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 3. A.W. Cash Valves. B. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded, and single union ends. C. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. Aft 2. 6 GARBAGE DISPOSAL A. Manufacturers: 1. In-Sink Erator, Model 555 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Hydro-o-Matic ■o b. Hobart 3 . Construction: Stainless steel continuous feed, .o single direction, with 1/3 hp capacitor start motor, corrosion protection shield, self-service wrenchette. 4W 3 PART 3 EXECUTION we 3 . 1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor , construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. D. Install water hammer arresters complete with accessible isolation valve [on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories, sinks, and washing machine outlets] . END OF SECTION 15430 - 4 �r 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 2.2 HOSE BIBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Zurn. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company. b. Josam Manufacturing Company. B. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self- draining type with polished bronze lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, integral backflow preventer, Model Z-1300 manufactured by Zurn. 2.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith, as noted on drawings. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Zurn. b. PDI. 2 .4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Regulatory Company. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Febco. b. Hersey. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSe 1013 AWWA c506; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve witch opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non- """ threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks, ; Model 909 manufactured by Watts. 2.5 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett Model 7. 2. Watts. """ 15430 - 3 ON A 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment .� required for interceptors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, Ago spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING am A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 CLEANOUTS (WCO & FCO) A. Manufacturers: 1.Zurn. .» 2 . Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Jay R. Smith Company. b. Josam Manufacturing Company. B. Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO) : Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep ° holes, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished ..� floor areas; Model ZN-14400-3 manufactured by Zurn. C. Interior Finished Wall Areas (WCO) : Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; Model ZN-1440-4 manufactured by Zurn. 15430 - 2 '�" 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 w SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 1 PART 1 GENERAL o 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES !„f, A. Cleanouts. B. Hose bibs/Hydrants. C. Water Hammer Arresters. D. Garbage Disposal 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. C. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. B. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. C. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 15430 - 1 em 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. J. Pressure test in accordance with local codes and regulations, in the presence of engineer. 3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new connection to existing sanitary sewer service. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with water meter with by-pass valves. 1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall. END OF SECTION A 15410 - 8 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or A, apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install water stops for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Provide plug valves in Natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum, maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 3.6 DISINFECTION AND TESTING OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before work is to be performed. B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. 00 C. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric) . D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. 15410 - 7 w 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 so 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non:-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Division 8. H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure proper coverage. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. L. Excavate in accordance with Division 2 Requirements. M. Backfill in accordance with Division 2 Requirements. N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. 15410 - 6 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. C. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends and renewable seat and disc. 014 2.7 WATER STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jenkin Brothers. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent wr products. a. Nibco Inc. b. Lunkinheimer Company. B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity (repackable under pressure) . C. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends, remove burrs, bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. ' "" 15410 - 5 go Wo 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 Im 2.4 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. on 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2 . Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec 1. 2.5 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS + A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2 . Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: 1. Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, ' designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. , 2 . Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.6 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Jenkin Brothers. 2 . Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent " products. a. Nibco Inc. b. Lunkinheimer Company .. 15410 - 4 rw f�a 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labelling in place. Inspect for damage. e1� C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1. 10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. ABS Pipe: ASTM D2680 or D2751. 1. Fittings: ABS. 2. Joints: ASTM D2235, solvent weld. 2.3 WATER PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K or L hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16. 18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 15410 - 3 40 ap 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 F. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) . G. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE "" A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. NCPWB Standard Procedure Specifications. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience] . 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with Massachusetts Plumbing codes. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 15410 - 2 a 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15410 f PLUMBING PIPING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. E. Natural gas piping system. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. C. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties. D. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. E. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping. B. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. C. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. D. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. E. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. 15410 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces, insulate as for concealed applications. Finish with FRJ jacket. Do not use PVC jackets. 3.3 SCHEDULE - INSULATION PIPING TYPE THICKNESS PIPE SIZE Domestic Hot Water Supply A or B 1/2" All Domestic Cold Water Supply A or B 1/2" All Sanitary Vent (Cold Spaces) A 1/2" All .. Heating Water Supply A or B 1" All Heating Water Return A or B 1" All END OF SECTION M. 4W ow No 15260 - 4 wr 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 WORK INCLUDED A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. C. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three years minimum experience. B. Materials: Flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation recommendations under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 15260 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 3.2 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterf lashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls and floors. ., 3.3 SLEEVES A. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and calk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. B. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished „ surfaces. C. Extend sleeves through floors and walls one (1) inch beyond finished surface. END OF SECTION 15140 - 4 �s r 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 C. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. D. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. E. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support. 2.2 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.3 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; " one lb/sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.4 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel or wood. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. 15140 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used 3 PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION Vii► 15010 - 3 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 12. Section 15980 - Instrumentation. 13. Section 15985 - Sequence of Operations. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1. 6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to current Massachusetts Building Code. B. Plumbing: Conform to Massachusetts Plumbing Code. C. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Engineer before proceeding. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include: 1. A copy of all shop drawings separated into their respective sections. The sequence and numbering shall follow the mechanical specifications. 2. Include all product data, assembly drawings, bearing data, maintenance data, start-up and shut down instructions and a replacement parts list. 15010 - 2 16 North Maple Street Renovation March, 1992 me Thermo Consulting Engineers 1W173 SECTION 15010 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.2 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award a contract for the entire project 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases to accommodate Architect's Phasing Plan and Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period, coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Architect/Owner. 1.4 REFERENCES A. See bid form for clarity. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Section: 1. Section 15170 - Motors 2. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation. 3 . Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties. 4. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. 5. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 6. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties. 7. Section 15540 - HVAC Pumps. 8. Section 15556 - Cast Iron Boilers. 9. Section 15835 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units. 10. Section 15870 - Power Ventilators. 11. Section 15973 - Electronic Control Systems. 15010 - 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect openings properly and are aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall construction with #10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer. ow Fasten plastic laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint. Fasten filled-polymer countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces . Form seams 1/8-inch wide and adhere with manufacturer' s recommended joint adhesive in color to match countertop. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide unencumbered operation. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. EXTRA STOCK Drawer/door pulls : provide five additional nylon pulls for Owner' s ow extra stock. END OF SECTION 12372 go KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect is within ten degrees of the cabinet front. ' CASEWORK HARDWARE General : Manufacturer' s standard units complying with ANSI A156 . 9 , of type , material , size, and finish as selected from manufacturer' s standard choices. COUNTERTOPS PLASTIC LAMINATE �. General : Comply with ANSI A161 . 2 . Countertop, Backsplash, and Endsplash Fabrication: Plastic laminate GP 50 on 3/4-inch particleboard, and as shown on drawings. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front style, cove, and backsplash style: Postformed units. COUNTERTOPS , FILLED POLYMER Filled Polymer: Comply with the following NEMA LD3 tests: Test Methods: 3 . 06 for high temperature resistance, 3 . 07 for cigarette resistance, 3 . 09 for stain and chemical resistance, and 3 . 10 for color stability. Rating : No change and no lasting effect . Countertop Thickness : 3/4-inch. Backsplash, Apron and Endsplash Thickness: 3/4-inch. Configuration: As per drawings. Backsplash and Endsplash Style: Square edge without scribe . PART 3 -- EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining "** surfaces , using concealed shims . Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe, and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips , scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework , face. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 6 wA, �a. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Drawer core fronts , sides and backs shall be miterfold assemblies consisting of 1/2" thick, 45-1b. density industrial grade particleboard with . 007" thick white vinyl wrapped around all exposed surfaces. The top edges of the assembly shall be radiused to prevent denting. Assemblies 9" to 24" shall have three mitered corner joints bonded with PVC adhesive. The fourth rear corner shall be bored and assembled with a butt joint containing two six mm hardwood dowels and PVA adhesive. Assemblies over 24" wide shall have both rear corners doweled in the same manner. The drawer shall be secured to the drawer front with a minimum of four W screws including the decorative hardware screws. The drawer bottom shall be 1/4" thick 50- lb. density particleboard with . 004" thick white vinyl on the interior side. The bottom shall be retained to the sides, front and back of the drawer core assembly by a 1/4" groove and secured with hot melt adhesive. Drawer bottoms 30" wide and over shall be 3/8" thick, 50-1b. white vinyl particleboard with . 004" thick white vinyl on the interior side. Roll-out trays shall be adjustable and mount to pre-bored holes in base and tall cabinet sides . One tray shall be standard with all base cabinets except 9" wide. Tray sides and backs shall be miter- fold assemblies consisting of 1/2" thick 45-1b. density industrial grade particleboard with . 007" thick white vinyl wrapped around all exposed surfaces. The top edges of the assembly shall be radiused to prevent denting. All assemblies shall have two mitered rear corners bonded with PVA adhesive. The tray sides shall be butted to the tray front with four 6 mm hardwood dowels and PVA adhesive. The tray front shall be 1/2" thick, 45-1b. density industrial grade fir particleboard wrapped with . 007" thick white vinyl. The tray front shall extend beyond each tray side to conceal the metal tray slides. The ends of the tray fronts shall be fitted with molded white plastic caps to act as a tray bumper which protects the cabinet door surface. The tray bottom shall be the same material as drawer bottoms and retained to the front, sides and back in the same manner. Door and drawer fronts shall be 5/8" thick, 48-1b. density industrial grade particleboard laminated on two sides with water and household chemical/abrasion resistant white melamine. The vertical and horizontal edges shall be edgebanded with solid color PVC edgebanding. Side-mounted, wrap around roller drawer and tray system shall be mounted on all drawer and try cores. This system shall consist of a pair of corrosion resistant white epoxy coated 1 . 25 mm steel �• slides that roll on close-tolerance nylon wheels. The wheels shall be isolated from the metal slides with a pliable "0" ring tire which dampens noise. Doors shall be mounted on fully-concealed, self-closing nickel- plated hinges. Hinges shall open to 120 degrees and provide six- way adjustability. The hinge shall close the cabinet door when it ow O, KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 5 4W 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect First Grade lumber as defined by NHLA. 00 Hardboard: ANSI A135 . 4 , Class 1 , tempered. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3 ; in thicknesses indicated and colors or patterns , and finishes as selected from approved samples. Thermoset Decorative Finish: ALA-1985 ; Melamine or polyester. Door and Drawer Pulls: Nylon heavy-duty wire pulls. PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK Case construction, end panels, and cabinet tops and bottoms shall be 5/8" thick, 48-1b. density industrial grade particleboard laminated on both sides with a water and household chemical , abrasion-resistant white melamine . Front exposed edge shall be covered with . 018" thick polyvinyl chloride edgebanding, which eliminates black edge or seam. Cabinet tops and bottoms shall receive 8 mm dowels and adhesive used in precision holes to join the tops and bottoms to the end panels . All backs shall be 1/4" thick, 50-1b. density particleboard with a water and household chemical resistant . 004" thick white vinyl w. laminated to the interior side . Wall cabinet backs shall be reinforced with 1/2" thick particleboard screw rails at the top and bottom. Wall cabinet backs shall be glued, stapled and retained by a groove in the end panels, top and bottom. Base cabinet backs shall be attached in the same manner. A 5/8" thick back rail shall extend to floor for added strength. All 24" or higher wall cabinets shall have adjustable shelves made of 5/8" thick, 48-1b. density industrial grade particleboard. The shelf top and bottom shall be laminated with the same white melamine as the cabinet interior. The front exposed edge shall be covered with a . 018" thick solid color PVC edgebanding. The PVC shall be impermeable to water and resistant to household chemicals. *■* Wall cabinets shall be precision drilled to provide three small diameter adjustable holes per shelf centered on 2 1/2" increments. Each shelf shall be fitted with durable steel reinforced nylon shelf supports . This combination provides a clean, uninterrupted interior that accommodates easy storage of tall and short items. 3/4" shelves shall be used on the following special cabinets: W332430 , WBC3630 , WBC3624 , WDFB3630 , WDF3624 and WDF3630 . Toe space shall be 5/8" thick, 48-1b. density industrial grade particleboard laminated with melamine finish. Toe boards shall be -. removable and held in place by metal clips mounted to cabinet sides . Toe boards shall be edgebanded with . 018" thick PVC . KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 4 "" w. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect 00 PROJECT CONDITIONS 40 Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturer' s recommendations for optimum temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework until these conditions have been attained and stabilized. Field Measurements : Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify kitchen casework can be installed in P0 compliance with the original design and referenced standards. Field Measurements: Verify countertop size and shape prior to fabrication by field measurements taken after base units are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Kitchen Casework: Merillat Industries, Inc . Style: Avia, frameless white plastic laminate cabinetry. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: Formica Corp. Laminart Nevamar Corp. Wilson Plastics Co. , Dart Industries , Inc . Filled Polymer for Countertops: Swanstone Du Pont Co. , Corian Nevamar Corp. , Fountainhead MATERIALS, GENERAL Sizes , dimensions, and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions . Particleboard: ANSI A208. 1 , mat-formed particleboard, Grade 1-M-2 with minimum density of 40 pcf, internal bond of 60 psi , and minimum screw-holding capacity of 225 lbs . on faces and 200 lbs. on edges. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from , , KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of so Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each casework type specified. am Product data for each hardware type specified. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories , no materials , finishes, and filler panels. Include fully dimensioned plans, elevations, and anchorage details to countertop and walls. go Shop drawings for countertops showing sizes , shapes, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining. no Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer' s color charts consisting of sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each s* type of material indicated or exposed to view. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type OR of material indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified , showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. .o Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. 4W Maintenance data for kitchen casework for inclusion in Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 . QUALITY ASSURANCE NKCA Certification: Provide kitchen casework with National Kitchen Cabinet Association (NKCA) "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semi-exposed location of each unit, evidencing compliance with above standard. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain kitchen casework from one source from a single manufacturer. DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver casework as a factory-assembled unit , packaged individually, and shipped each in its own carton. KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 2 +• eiw 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect SECTION 12372 - KITCHEN CASEWORK -go PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes kitchen cabinets and countertops. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 11 Section "Residential Equipment" for appliances mounted in kitchen casework. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops. DEFINITIONS w Exposed Surfaces : Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed; behind clear glass doors; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor. Semi-exposed Surfaces : Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or drawers are extended; bottoms of casework are more than 30 inches and less than 42 inches above finished floor. Concealed Surfaces : Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after installation; bottoms of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor; tops of casework over 78 inches above finished floor and not visible from an upper level ; stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers . Reveal Overlay: Door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet frame. Flush Overlay: Door and drawer faces cover cabinet frame with space between faces sufficient for operating clearance. AM Flush: Door and drawer faces flush with cabinet face . , KITCHEN CASEWORK 12372 1 No 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Single Oven: Built-in unit with self-cleaning oven with automatic go door lock, lift-off door for cleaning ; for installation in 27" wide cabinet; control panel with electronic time and temperature touchpad controls; porcelain broiler pan; oven light . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of the following: Frigidaire; White Consolidated Ind. Model REG75WL s Refrigerator/Freezers : Side-BY-Side Type: Freestanding , two-door unit ; 22 cubic foot capacity; three adjustable door shelves ; four full-width adjustable white epoxy wire shelves ; meat keeper with adjustable control ; two ice trays with ice server. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of the following: , . Frigidaire; White Consolidated Ind. Model FPCIS22VP PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION• General : Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations . Built-In Equipment : Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops and concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. Freestanding Equipment : Place units in final locations after finishes 0-4 have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment . 40 Utilities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. ADJUST AND CLEAN: Testing : Test each item or residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. Accessories : Verify that accessory items required have been furnished. �w Cleaning : Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION 11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect ' indicating compliance with requirements . Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of residential equipment. Schedule : Submit schedule of residential equipment, using same room designations shown on drawings . .� DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver products to project site in manufacturer' s undamaged protective containers, after spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed. SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTIES : Submit manufacturer' s standard written warranty for each item of residential equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: Colors: Provide manufacturer' s standard colors as shown or scheduled. If no color indicated, provide white . Electric Cooktops: 30" Countertop Type: Built-in unit with four solid disk elements set . in tempered glass and infinitely variable controls , surface unit signal light , and pull-off control knobs. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide the following: Frigidaire; White Consolidated Ind. Model RBS138L Range Hoods: Ventilating Type : 30" hood for mounting below wall cabinets, with infinite speed blower, permanent washable filter, built-in lighting, baked-on enamel finish, rated at 200 cfm, minimum; complete with duct, wall cap and shutter. Unit to be capable of providing remote switches at counter height. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide �. products of the following: Frigidaire ; White Consolidated Ind. Model HC7630 White Electric Wall Ovens: ,■„ RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 2 ,,,, On 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect I'm SECTION 11450 - RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS : w. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of residential equipment required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. s� Types of residential equipment required include the following: Electric cooktops. Range Hoods. Electric wall ovens . Refrigerator/freezers . Washer/Dryer unit , commercial type, is to be provided as an Allowance, and is not to be included as part of this section. Plumbing requirements are specified in Division 15 . Electrical services and connections are specified in Division 16 . QUALITY ASSURANCE: Certification Labels: Provide residential equipment which complies with standards and bears certification labels as follows : Energy Ratings : Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs ) and efficiency information as w required by Federal Trade Commission. UL Standards: Provide residential equipment with UL labels. Uniformity: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of residential equipment required. To greatest extent possible, provide residential equipment by single manufacturer for entire project. SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s specifications and installation instructions for each type of residential equipment, including data RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE Bath 1 ■ 1-toilet tissue dispenser 1-medicine cabinet, surface-mounted 1-robe hook �•. 1-24" towel bar 1-soap dish W Bath 2 1-toilet tissue dispenser 1-medicine cabinet, recessed 1-robe hook "" 2-24" towel bars 1-soap dish 1-24" grab bar ,o 2-48" grab bars 2-30" grab bars 1-shower curtain rod OR Bath 3 , Bath 4 (per bath) 1-toilet tissue dispenser 1-medicine cabinet, surface-mounted 1-robe hook 2-24" towel bars 1-soap dish 1-shower curtain rod END OF SECTION 10800 use► W TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 4-inch wall depth and consisting of hinged stainless steel framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet with minimum 4 adjustable shelves. Door equipped with full-length piano hinge and , spring-buffered rod-type stop and magnetic door catch. Fabricate mirror frame , door, and hing of stainless steel . Body to be heavy gauge prime sheets of cold rolled steel , bonderized after forming to resist rust , with white baked enamel finish. Provide mirror glass MW quality as specified under "Materials, General . " Furnish in nominal 16-inch by 40-inch mirror size. am Medicine Cabinet : same as above, except surface-mounted. Double Robe Hook: Heavy-duty satin finished stainless steel double-prong robe hook; rectangular wall bracket with backplate for .m concealed mounting . Tumbler and Toothbrush Holder: Satin-finished stainless steel unit "" with 2-1/4-inch-diameter hole in center to hold tumbler and 2 holes on each side to accommodate total of 4 toothbrushes ; rectangular wall bracket equipped with backplate for concealed mounting . go Soap Dish: Satin-finished stainless steel soap dish with rectangular wall bracket equipped with backplate for concealed mounting. FABRICATION General : No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface , provide identification of each accessory item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer' s name and product model number. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories General .' Except where otherwise " indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints , exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. • Recessed Toilet Accessories General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge . Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. sm PART 3 - EXECUTION .m INSTALLATION Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers ' am instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit . Install units plumb and level , am TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 4 o, No 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect C 1036 , Type I , Class 1 , Quality q2 , and with silvering , electro- plated copper coating , and protective organic coating . Stainless Steel Mirror Surfaces: Not less than 20-gage ( . 040-inch) , AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel sheet , hand- selected, stretcher-leveled with either No. 8 polished mirror finish or Type + 430 "auto brite" annealed reflective finish. Bond to 1/4-inch (minimum) hardboard backing . e� Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A 153 , hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fasteners : Screws , bolts , and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. +wA TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS Single-Roll Dispenser: Size to accommodate core tissue to 5-inch- diameter roll . GRAB BARS Stainless Steel Type : Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 gage ( . 050 inch) and as follows: Mounting : Exposed, manufacturer' s standard flanges and anchorages. Clearance : 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. Gripping Surfaces : Manufacturer' s standard nonslip texture. Heavy-Duty Size : Outside diameter of 1-1/4 inches . SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIES Shower Curtain Rod, Normal Duty: 1 inch O.D. , 20-gage ( . 040-inch) stainless steel , satin finish; furnish with 3 inch O.D. , minimum 20-gage stainless steel flanges with satin finish, designed for , w exposed fasteners . Towel Bar: 24-inch-long satin-finished Type 304 stainless steel w� tubular ( 3/4-inch-square ) bar and rectangular end brackets . Provide galvanized backplates for concealed mounting . MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Medicine Cabinet : Unit designed for recessed mounting in nominal TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 3 m 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect No PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations , installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper AM installation, operation, adjustment , cleaning , and servicing of toilet accessory items. MW WARRANTY Special Protect Warranty: Provide manufacturer' s written 5-year no warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors , agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include , but are not limited to, the following : A & J Washroom Accessories. American Specialties, Inc . Bobrick Washroom Equipment , Inc. Bradley Corporation. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. MATERIALS. GENERAL Stainless Steel : AISI Type 302/304 , with polished No . 4 finish, 22-gage ( . 034-inch ) minimum thickness , unless otherwise indicated. Brass : Leaded and unleaded, flat products , ASTM B 19 ; rods , shapes , forgings , and flat products with finished edges , ASTM B 16 , Castings , ASTM B-30 . Sheet Steel : Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366 , 20-gage ( . 040-inch) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. 4W Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 , G60 . Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal , ASTM B 456 , Type SC 2 . Baked Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating . Mirror Glass : Nominal 6. 0 mm ( 0. 23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES go PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: Toilet tissue dispenser. Grab bar. Shower curtain rod. Towel bar. Medicine cabinet. Robe hook. Soap dish, surface mounted. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials , dimensions, gages , profiles , method of mounting , specified options , and finishes . Schedule : Indicating types, quantities , sizes , and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project . „ QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same ”" areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect . on TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 1 w 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 4■ Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities . Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer' s instructions. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer' s $a instructions. Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and bracket-mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect. SCHEDULE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Level One : 1-bracket-mounted extinguisher in Electrical Room. 1-bracket-mounted extinguisher in Mechanical Room. 1-bracket-mounted extinguisher in Hall Closet under Stair 1 . 1-cabinet type extinguisher in Kitchen. Level Two: 1-cabinet type extinguisher in Bath. ws Level Three : 1-cabinet type extinguisher in Bath. END OF SECTION 10522 so w 4" FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS , AND ACCESSORIES 10522 5 4W 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals no spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface. Letter size , style , and location as selected by Architect. Door Hardware : Provide manufacturer' s standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull , exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS . GENERAL Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes . Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. STEEL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISHES Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces in compliance with SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil , grease , and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust , if present, from uncoated steel in compliance with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast 4W Cleaning ) or SSPC-SP 8 ( Pickling ) . Factory-Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately following surface preparation and pretreatment . Shop Primer: Manufacturer' s or Fabricator' s standard, fast- curing , lead-free , "universal" primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer' s standard 2-coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat . Comply with paint manufacturer' s instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 . 0 mils . Color and Gloss : As selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard choices for color and gloss . PART 3 - EXECUTION 4W INSTALLATION ,., FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS , AND ACCESSORIES 10522 4 OR 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated in plated finish. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets and for those located in cabinets, where indicated or required. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 40 General : Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated. ON Construction: Manufacturer' s standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style , and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld "" perimeter door frames. Cabinet Type : Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the OWN following types : Semirecessed: Cabinet box ( tub) partially recessed in walls of .r shallow depth. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. go Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and 40 wall return at outer edge ( backbend) . Square-Edge Trim with 1/4- to 5/16-inch backbend depth. OR Trim Metal : Of same metal and finish as door. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer' s standard door ow construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. #, Enameled Steel : Manufacturer' s standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles and rails. Door Glazing : Tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048 , M0 Type I , Quality q3 , Class as follows: Clear glass, Class 1 (transparent ) . on Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling with EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. Provide lettering to comply as requirements indicated for letter style , color, size , spacing , and location or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard arrangements . on Application Process : Silk screen. N FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 3 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect "Listing Mark" for type, rating , and classification of extinguisher. .. FM-Listed Products : Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type , rating, and classification of "` extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS "W MANUFACTURERS .� Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to , the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products by one of the following: Allenco . Ansul Fire Protection, Wormald US Inc. Badger-Powhatan. Bobrick Washroom Equipment , Inc . J. L. Industries . Larsen' s Manufacturing Co. Modern Metal Products by Muckle. Potter-Roemer, Inc . Samson Metal Products, Inc. ON Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde , Inc . Watrous Inc . American Specialties Inc. an Bobrick Washroom Equipment , Inc . FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .s General : Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated in Schedule at end of this section, in .n colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard, which comply with requirements of governing authorities . Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related .� to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type : UL-rated 1-A: 10-B:C, 2-1/2-lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. ow MOUNTING BRACKETS .. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 2 "° 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS . CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and 40 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY on This Section includes the following: Fire extinguishers . Fire extinguisher cabinets. "' Mounting brackets. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, Product data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough-in dimensions , details showing mounting methods , relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials , trim style , door construction, panel style, and materials . Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer' s color charts showing full range of colors available for those units with factory-applied color finishes. Samples for verification purposes of each type of metal finish required, prepared on metal samples of same thickness and alloy indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 40 QUALITY ASSURANCE """ Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. •N Coordination: Verify that fire extinguisher cabinets are sized to accommodate fire extinguishers provided by Owner under separate contract of type and capacity indicated. o UL-Listed Products : Fire extinguishers UL-listed and bear UL 4M FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS , AND ACCESSORIES 10522 1 so 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect go First Coat: Cut Shellac ( FS TT-S-300 ) . Second Coat: Paste Wax ( FS P-W-158 ) . Third Coat: Paste Wax (FS P-W-158 ) . ew Fourth Coat : Paste Wax ( FS P-W-158 ) . go Ferrous Metal Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2 . 5 mils . 40 Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664 ) . Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat ( FS TT-E-543 ) . Finish Coat : Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-506 ) . Zinc-Coated Metal : Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2 . 5 mils. oft Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer ( FS TT-P-641 ) . Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543 ) . Finish Coat: Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-506 ) . END OF SECTION 09900 go OR OR 00 ,,m PAINTING 09900 15 MW 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .o TT-P- 37 ) . Zinc-Coated Metal : High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel : 2 finish coats over primer. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer ( FS TT-P-641 ) . First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel ( FS TT-E-489 ) . Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel ( FS TT-E-489 ) . INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE General : Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates , as indicated. Concrete and Masonry (Other than concrete masonry units ) : Odorless Lusterless ( Flat ) Latex Finish: 2 coats. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint ( FS TT-P-29 ) . Second Coat : Interior Flat Odorless Alkyd Paint (FS TT-P- 30 ) . Gypsum Drywall Systems: Lusterless ( Flat ) Emulsion Finish: 2 coats . Primer: Latex-Based Interior White Primer ( FS TT-P-650 ) . ., Finish Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint ( FS TT-P-29 ) . Odorless Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2 . 5 mils. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer ( FS TT-P-650 ) . First Coat: Interior Gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel ( FS TT-E-509 ) . Second Coat: Interior Gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel ( FS TT-E-509 ) . .. Woodwork and Hardboard: am Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats. up Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat ( FS TT-E-543 ) . First Coat : Alkyd Gloss Enamel ( FS TT-E-506 ) . Second Coat : Alkyd Gloss Enamel ( FS TT-E-506 ) . , Natural-Finish Woodwork: Polished Wax Finish: 4 coats. PAINTING 09900 14 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE General : Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other than concrete masonry units ) : Lusterless ( Flat ) Acrylic Finish: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2 . 5 mils. First Coat : Exterior Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19 ) . Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion ( FS TT-P-19 ) . Wood: Alkyd Gloss Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 3 . 5 mils . ,Mw Primer: Exterior Primer Coating ( FS TT-P-25 ) . First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (TT-E-489 ) . Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (TT-E-489 ) . Low-Luster Finish: 2 finish coats over primer. Primer: Exterior Primer Coating (FS TT-P-25 ) . First Coat : Exterior Acrylic Emulsion (FS TT-P-19 ) . Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion ( FS TT-P-19 ) . Wood Trim: Medium-Shade , High-Gloss Alkyd Finish: 2 finish coats over primer. Primer: Exterior Primer Coating ( FS TT-P-25 ) . First Coat : Medium-Shade, Ready-Mixed Exterior Oil Paint ( FS ++ TT-P-81 ) . Second Coat : Medium-Shade , Ready-Mixed Exterior Oil Paint (FS TT-P-81 ) . Ferrous Metal : Primer is not required on shop-primed items. Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel : 2 finish coats over primer. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer ( FS TT-P-664 ) . First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel ( FS TT-E-489 ) . Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel ( FS TT-E-489 ) . Deep Color, High-Gloss Alkyd Trim Enamel : Two coats over primer. Primer: Alkyd-Type Zinc Chromate Primer ( FS TT-P-645 ) . First Coat: Deep Color Alkyd Resin Exterior Trim Paint (FS TT-P-37 ) . Second Coat: Deep Color Alkyd Resin Exterior Trim Paint ( FS PAINTING 09900 13 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans , rags , OR rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. Upon completion of painting , clean glass and paint-spattered OW surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping , using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces . ..w PROTECTION Protect work of other trades , whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning , repairing or replacing , and repainting, as acceptable to Architect . Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes . Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades , touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. ww PAINTING 09900 12 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect opaque , smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance , an coverage. Cloudiness, spotting , holidays, laps , brush marks , runs , sags, ropiness , or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Transparent ( Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a go glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps , cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel , nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats . Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture , and coverage . Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL w The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: ON The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, 00 sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: Quantitative materials analysis. Abrasion resistance. 4 Apparent reflectivity. Flexibility. Washability. Absorption. Accelerated weathering. Dry opacity. Accelerated yellowness. Recoating. Skinning. Color retention. �w Alkali and mildew resistance. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing , repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if , upon repainting with specified paint , the two coatings are noncompatible. CLEANING PAINTING 09900 11 dw 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when OR permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. am Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently **� fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment . Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces . Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat . Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading rate . Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. .w Prime Coats : Before application of finish coats , apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears , to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. ** Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, ' irregularity in texture, skid marks , or other surface imperfections . Pigmented !Opaque ) Finishes : Completely cover to provide an PAINTING 09900 10 .. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat . Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet 40 metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials awe in accordance with manufacturer' s directions . Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue . Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material . Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 40 Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat , but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat . APPLICATION Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer' s directions . Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust , scale , grease , moisture , scuffed 00 surfaces , or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. go Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding AN coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with 00 the manufacturer' s directions . Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains , or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces , including edges, corners , crevices, welds , and exposed fasteners , receive a dry film + thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces . PAINTING 09900 9 oft 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated MM with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 4M Cementitious Materials : Prepare concrete and masonry surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust , dirt, grease , oils , and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. •m If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. Do not use abrasive blast-cleaning methods for masonry MW surfaces. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer' s printed directions. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil , and other foreign substances • with scrapers , mineral spirits , and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. Scrape and clean small , dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood ®' filler. Sand smooth when dried. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon ..� delivery. Prime edges, ends , faces, undersides , and backsides of wood, including cabinets , counters , cases, and paneling. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, Plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. Seal tops, bottoms , and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil , grease , dirt , loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council . Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by PAINTING 09900 8 """ 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect MISCELLANEOUS WOOD FINISHING MATERIALS Paste Wood Filler: Solvent-based, air-drying , paste-type wood filler for use on open-grain wood on interior wood surfaces: Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler. Pittsburgh: (none required) S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. Paste Wax: Provide paste wax as recommended by the coating manufacturer for use on interior stained and natural-finished woodwork. No Non-Stain Polyurethane: Water-based, air-drying stain for use on interior wood surfaces: ON Provide product from one of the manufacturers listed. PART 3 -. EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '0 Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator' s acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. PREPARATION General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories , plates , machined surfaces , lighting fixtures , and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting . Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments . Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces . +0 Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer' s instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. ON Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove an 00 PAINTING 09900 7 Aft 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Devoe : 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat an House Paint. Moore : Moorgard Latex House Paint #103 . Pittsburgh: 72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint. am P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint . S-W: A100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. .. Alkyd Gloss Enamel : Weather-resistant , air-drying , high gloss enamel for use on the exterior over prime-coated wood: Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel . Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 . Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel . P & L: Effecto Enamel . S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series . Alkyd Gloss Enamel : Weather-resistant high-gloss enamel for use .� over primed, zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and aluminum: Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel . .. Glidden: 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel . Moore : Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 . Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel . ON P & L: Effecto Enamel . S-W: Metalastic II Enamel B-53 Series . .m INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint : Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for am use as a flat finish over concrete and masonry surfaces, including filled concrete masonry block, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels , and plaster and over prime-coated gypsum drywall , ferrous metal , and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. . Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215 . Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint . P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. Interior Gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel : Low-odor, semigloss, alkyd enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on concrete, masonry *�! ( including concrete masonry block) , plaster, wood, and hardboard and both ferrous and zinc-coated (galvanized ) metal surfaces and over a primer on gypsum drywall : MM Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Gloss Enamel . Moore: Moore' s Satin Impervo Enamel #235 . Pittsburgh: 27 Line Wallhide Gloss Enamel . W^ P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel . S-W: Classic 99 Gloss Enamel A40 Series. PAINTING 09900 6 "" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Devoe and Raynolds Co . (Devoe ) . Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore ) . PPG Industries , Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh) . Pratt and Lambert (P & L) . The Sherwin-Williams Company ( S-W) . uw PRIMERS Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd semigloss enamel . Devoe : 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. Moore: Moore' s Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201 . Pittsburgh: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001 . S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 . Synthetic , Rust.-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying , rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior under full-gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels : Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163 . , ., Pittsburgh: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1 . Exterior Acrylic Emulsion Primer: Quick-drying primer for priming bare and painted wood on the exterior, under acrylic emulsion finish coats. Provide product from one of the manufacturers listed. EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying , flat, acrylic paint for use on the exterior over concrete and masonry surfaces : Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint . Moore: Moore' s Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105 . Pittsburgh: 72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint . P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A- 6 Series. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying , flat, acrylic paint for use on the exterior over prime-coated wood and sealed and prime- . coated painted plywood: PAINTING 09900 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Federal Specifications , yet differ in quantitative requirements , may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer' s certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,.t Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer' s original , unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer' s name and label and the following information: Product name or title of material . Product description (generic classification or binder t Federal Specification number, if applicable. type ) . Manufacturer' s stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents . ' Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F ( 7 deg C ) . Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. MW Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling , mixing , and application. AM JOB CONDITIONS an Apply water-based Paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F ( 10 deg C) and 90 deg F ( 32 deg C) . OW Do not apply Paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F ( 3 am deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. ru PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following: PAINTING 09900 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual w conditions , on representative samples of the actual substrate . Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect' s review of color and texture only: Painted Wood: Provide two 12- by 12-inch samples of each color and material on hardboard. Pickled and Sealed Wood: Provide two 4- by 8-inch samples of natural and stained wood finish on samples of actual wood surfaces. On actual surfaces to be painted, prepare and paint a three-foot square section of each surface to be painted, to verify compatibility of new paints over existing finishes . Prepare the field sample a minimum of 30 days in advance of commencement of work, to allow for aging of sample . QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates . On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. wwr Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. Material QualitY: Provide the manufacturer' s best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer' s product +0 identification will not be acceptable. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not WX intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for so paint materials, except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable '"" PAINTING 09900 3 4M 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include : No Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel . **� Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze. .�. Brass . Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: Valve and damper operators . Linkages. Sensing devices . Motor and fan shafts. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter' s Laboratories , Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name , identification, performance rating , or nomenclature plates . Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 8 Section "Insulated Metal Doors" for shop priming steel doors and frames. Divisions 15 and 16 : Painting mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16 , respectively. DEFINITIONS "Paint" includes coating systems materials , primers , emulsions , MW enamels , stains, sealers and fillers , and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate , or finish coats . SUBMITTALS Product Data: Manufacturer' s technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer' s catalog number and general classification. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer' s color charts. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. PAINTING 09900 2 """ 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 09900 - PAINTING �w PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation, painting , and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. a�w Surface preparation, priming , and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections . Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules, " except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural . Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces . If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. Paint all previously painted surfaces. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts ( including color coding ) , hangers , and primed metal * surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment . Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts , and labels . Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components : Finished mechanical and electrical equipment . Light fixtures. Switchgear. Distribution cabinets. �. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: Foundation spaces. 40 Furred areas. Utility tunnels. Pipe spaces. PAINTING 09900 1 .. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with an commercial machine with face-beater element . Remove soil . Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. .M Vacuum carpet. .m PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions , in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09680 M" we wsr CARPET 09680 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect INSTALLATION +0 Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame , in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet . Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges . Install tackless carpet stripping by nailing . Locate to ensure ON concealment of carpet edge between stripping and base of wall . Lay strip at entire perimeter of carpeted space , obstructions , and cutouts . Provide narrow stripping with 2 rows of pins where OR stretched width of carpet is 20 feet or less; stripping with 3 rows of pins where carpet width exceeds 20 feet . Install cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams . Place cushion face up as recommended by cushion manufacturer. Apply minimum 2-inch fabric-type adhesive tape on cushion seams . In ramped floor areas , increase anchorage or adhesive. Bond carpet cushion to substrate . Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. Install carpet by trimming edges , butting cuts with seaming cement, and taping and/or sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for on stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet . Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free , taut , trim edges ; secure to stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping . Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20 feet . Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions . Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps . Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Carpet runner to receive finished seams at stairways . CLEANING Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer' s recommended "0 cleaning agent. " "" CARPET 09680 5 aft 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Dyeing Method: Solution dyed. Carpet Fiber: Nylon (Antron, Zeftron, Spectron, etc. ) Carpet Backing: Provide unitary backing of standard weight, as recommended by manufacturer for adequate strength and carpet stability without application of secondary sheet-type backing , and as appropriate for service and exposure indicated. CARPET CUSHION Cushion Type A-1 : Natural fiber; sterilized, mildew resistant , and permanently mothproofed. Weight : 40 oz . Thickness : 5/16 inch plus 5 percent maximum. ACCESSORIES Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips , 3/8-inch or 9/32-inch thick, as required to match cushion thickness; 2 rows or 3 rows, as indicated in Part 3 below, of angular pins protruding from top, designed to grip and hold stretched carpet at backing . .. Seaming Cement : Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and . butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams . Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet . Cushion Adhesive : Manufacturer' s recommended mildew-resistant adhesive, produced expressly for use with selected carpet cushion on substrate. Ob PART 3 - EXECUTION as PREPARATION Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete as surfaces to receive carpet ; apply sealer to prevent dusting. Patch holes and cracks, and level to a smooth surface. If dw finish chemically stripped, previous Y pped, reseal concrete . Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. so CARPET 09680 4 00 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 00 EXTRA MATERIALS Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents . Carpet: Before installation begins , furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed. �r PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include , but are not limited to, the following: Carpet Cushion: Chris Craft Industries, Inc . ' Dixie Manufacturing Co. E. R. Carpenter Co. , Inc. General Felt Industries, Inc . !* Ludlow Carpet Cushion. Olin Corp. , Omalon Carpet Foundation. Sponge Cushion Inc . Uniroyal , Inc . Carpet : Philadelphia Carpets J & J Mills CARPET Carpet style : tufted loop pile . Stitches or rows: 8 . 5 per inch. Gauge or Pitch: 1/8 am Pile Height: . 147 average SO Tufted Yarn Weight : 28 oz . per square yard FHA Density: ETL 19172 e0 Carpet Color, Pattern and Texture : Provide materials in colors and as selected by Architect from ** manufacturer' s standard colors . CARPET 09680 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect with "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-44C" published by U. S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and are currently listed in HUD "Certified Products Directory" and so identified by imprint on back of carpet . Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics : Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics , per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70 . Rating: Pass. Cushion Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet cushion identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics , per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having ,. jurisdiction. Identify carpet cushion with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70 . .ft Rating : Pass . Test Method: ASTM E 84 . Am Flame Spread: 25 or less. Smoke Developed: 450 or less . DELIVERY-L. STORAGE AND HANDLING .� Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers , labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name , and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers , inside .s well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures , and humidity. Lay flat , blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F ( 20 deg C ) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. OA PROJECT CONDITIONS Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside AW of 4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet , fully taped at perimeter to substrate . am CARPET 09680 2 a" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes carpet , installation, accessories , and cushion. Related Sections: Edge strips are specified in Division 9 section "Resilient Flooring" . SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading , and flame resistance characteristics. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns , doorways , enclosing walls or partitions , built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet . Show installation details at special conditions. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer' s standard size , showing full range of color, texture , and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the following : 12-inch-square samples of each type of carpet material required. 12-inch-long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item. 6-inch-square samples of each type of carpet cushion. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer' s Qualification: Firm whose carpet materials comply CARPET 09680 1 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 40 Cover resilient flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for substantial completion. ft Clean resilient flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to cleaning. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. EXTRA STOCK: r. Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels . Sheet Flooring : Furnish not less than 3 linear yards for each type, color and pattern installed. END OF SECTION 09650 .w no ew RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Lay sheet flooring to provide as few seams as possible with ON economical use of materials . Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams in compliance with manufacturer' s recommendations. Adhere sheet flooring to substrates using method approved by flooring manufacturer for type of sheet flooring and substrate condition indicated. on Use conventional perimeter bonding adhesive procedures where recommended by flooring manufacturer. Prepare seams in vinyl sheet flooring in accordance with the MR manufacturer' s instructions for most inconspicuous appearance, sealing continuously with fluid-applied sealant or adhesive as standard with manufacturer. An INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES: •wo Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive . Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil . Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes , using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer' s directions. Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces free from soil , excess adhesive or surface blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to resilient flooring manufacturer. 40 Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 5 Wo 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect ascertain presence of curing compounds . Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. wM PREPARATION: Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors . low Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with • resilient flooring adhesives, paint , oils , waxes and sealers . Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. INSTALLATION: INSTALLATION, GENERAL: Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer' s printed instructions. Extend resilient flooring into toe spaces , door reveals , and into closets and similar openings. Scribe , cut , and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures , built-in furniture and cabinets , pipes , outlets and permanent columns , walls and partitions . Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or 00 plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device . no Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and other such items occurring within finished floor areas . .. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed in these covers . Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks , voids , raising and puckering at joints , telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks , or other surface imperfections . Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. INSTALLATION OF SHEET FLOORING: RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Manufacturers of Filled Vinyl with Fibrous Backin Armstrong World Industries, Inc . RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS : Provide colors and patterns as indicated, or if not otherwise so indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standards . Type : Armstrong Classic Corlon, Suffield VINYL SHEET FLOORING: Filled vinyl sheet products are those with a vinyl plastic wearlayer complying with descriptive requirements of FS L-F-475 for wearing surface. Filled Vinyl Sheet with Backing: Provide vinyl sheet with filled vinyl plastic wearlayer and fibrous backing complying with FS L-F-475 , Type II , Grade A requirements, with manufacturer' s recommended static load limit of 100 psi , and 72" minimum sheet width. ACCESSORIES : Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge , color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available ; not less than 1" wide. Adhesives ( Cements ) : Waterproof , stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions . Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION: Require Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks , holes, ridges , coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance . an Perform bond and moisture tests on furred lower level floors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently cured and dry as well as to RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 3 W& 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect me Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer' s standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient flooring , including accessories, showing full range of colors and so patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring required. Samples for Verification Purposes : Submit the following samples of WN each type , color and pattern of resilient flooring required, showing full-range of color and pattern variations . 6" x 9" samples of sheet flooring. am 2-1/2" long samples of resilient flooring accessories . ■w Other materials as requested. Certification for Fire Test Performance: Submit certification from an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that resilient flooring complies with fire test performance requirements . Maintenance Instructions : Submit 2 copies of manufacturer' s recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F ( 18 degrees C ) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 ' degrees F ( 13 degrees C ) in areas where work is completed. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations , including painting , have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring furred concrete floor until floor is sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer' s recommended bond and moisture test . PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS : Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the .� work include , but are not limited to , the following : Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following : RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 2 �. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections , go apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds . Fire Test Performance: Provide resilient flooring which complies with the following fire test performance criteria as determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Critical Radiant Flux CRF : Not less than the following rating '"o per ASTM E 648 . 0 . 45 watts per sq. cm. rye 0 . 22 watts per sq. cm. Flame Spread: Not more than 75 per ASTM E 84 . Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84 . Smoke Density: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 662 . Installer' s Qualifications: Engage Installer who is certified in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer as qualified for installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams. SUBMITTALS : Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. do RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 1 Oft 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect s Install corner beads at external corners . Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise aw be exposed or semi-exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive ,joint compound except where "U" bead ( semi-finishing type ) is indicated. ,.W Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. FINISHING OF DRYWALL: General : Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints ( both directions ) ; flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control ,joints ; penetrations ; fastener heads , surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges , if any, using setting-type joint compound. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards , except where trim accessories are indicated. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following ,joint compounds in 3 coats (not including pref ill of openings in base ) , and sand between coats and after last coat : Embedding and First Coat : Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping compound. Fill ( Second ) Coat : Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. Finish ( Third ) Coat : Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. PROTECTION: Provide final protection and maintain conditions , in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ,w END OF SECTION 09250 Aw GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 6 �► 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect stairwells and similar high walls , install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs . Install exposed gypsum board with face side out . Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards . Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space ?'! between boards. Do not force into place. Locate either edge or end Joints over supports , except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints . Position boards so that like edges abut , tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends . Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends . Stagger vertical ,joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions . Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts . Floating Construction: Where feasible , including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer' s recommendations. METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION: Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows : On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board 40 application to the greatest extent possible . On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically ( parallel to framing ) , unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end ,joints . On partitions/walls 8 ' -1 " or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing ) ; use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints. Single-Layer Fastening Methods : Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows : Fasten with screws. INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES : so General : Where feasible , use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports . Otherwise , fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer' s recommendations . so GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 5 we 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect am Joint Tape : Paper reinforcing tape , unless otherwise indicated. Use pressure sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass fiber „„ reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. w Drying-Type Joint Compounds : Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. on All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. No MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: General : Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002 . Gypsum Board Nails : ASTM C 514 . "" PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts , with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of w drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION: APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD GENERAL: Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 . Locate exposed end-butt Joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible , and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints , and which avoids end joints in the .. central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches . Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible . At GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 4 W 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect GYPSUM BOARD: General : Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints. Thickness : Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, in either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and ON support spacing indicated. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 , and as follows: Type : Regular, unless otherwise indicated. Type: Type X for fire-resistance-rated assemblies . Edges: Tapered. Thickness : 1/2 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Thickness : 5/8 inch for Type X assemblies. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , provide one of the following products where Type X gypsum wallboard is indicated: "Gyprock Fireguard 'C' Gypsum Board" ; Domtar Gypsum Co . "Fire-Shield G" ; Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Co . "SHEETROCK Brand FIRECODE 'C' Gypsum Panels" ; United States Gypsum Co . TRIM ACCESSORIES : Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads , edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: Material : Formed metal , plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirements : Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047 : No "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS : 04 General : Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475 , ASTM C 840 , and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint wo treatment materials for the application indicated. on GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Deliver materials in original packages , containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging . Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges , ends , and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. PROJECT CONDITIONS: P.. Environmental Conditions , General : Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer ' s recommendations . Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing , maintain not less than 40 deg F ( 4 deg C ) . For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F ( 10 deg C ) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete . Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials . Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS : Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include , but are not limited to , the following : Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following : Gypsum Boards and Related Products : Centex American Gypsum Co. Domtar Gypsum Co. Georgia-Pacific Corp. Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Co . United States Gypsum Co . GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY: Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction: Gypsum board nail-attached to wood framing and furring members . Wood framing and furring are specified in the following Division 6 sections : "Rough Carpentry. " DEFINITIONS : Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards . SUBMITTALS: Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Fire-Resistance Ratings : Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No' s . in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. '""" GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 1 OR 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Hardware Set No . 5 : ( For each door 7 , 8 , 11 , 35 ) . 00 1 1/2 pair Butts 1 Passage Set ( same as Bedroom Closet designation) 1 Wall Stop 1 Kick Plate at door 7 only Hardware Set No . 6 : ( For each door 6 , 10 , 25 , 26 ) . 1 1/2 pair Butts 1 Bathroom Lock (privacy) 1 Wall Stop 1 Kick Plate at door 6 only go Hardware Set No. 7 : (For door 4 ) . O. 2 white nylon pulls 2 sets Bifold Door Package ift Hardware Set No. 8 : (For door 5 ) . 1 white nylon pull 1 set Bifold Door Package END OF SECTION 08710 � n 40 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 11 ar 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .n Bathroom Locks : Sargent 6165 OSL Privacy Hall Closet : Sargent 6104 OSL Storeroom as Closer: Sargent 1231 Exterior Hinges : Stanley #741 3 1/2 x 3 1/2 - US3 Peephole : Baldwin 0155 Doorstop: Stanley CD7095 Bright Brass Bifold Doors : Stanley 2916 Complete Package Unit Numbers: Baldwin 0640 , US3 Door Sweep: Stanley 5070 28DM finish Finishes to be BHMA 612 , Satin Bronze , , unless otherwise noted. Hardware Set No . ( ll : ( For each door 1 , 9 , 12 , 36 ) . 1 1/2 Pair Butts by door manufacturer 1 Entry Lock 1 Closer 1 set Weatherstripping by door manufacturer 1 Sill Sweep 1 Threshold by door manufacturer Hardware Set No . 2 : ( For each door 3 , 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 , 21 , 23 , 27 , 29 , 31 , 33 ) . 1 1/2 pair Butts 1 Bedroom Lock 1 Kickplate for door 3 only 1 Wall Stop Hardware Set No. 3 : ( For each door 2 , 37 ) . *"! 1 1/2 pair Butts 1 Hall Closet Lock Hardware Set No . 4 : ( For each door 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 , 22 , 24 , 28 , 30 , 32 , 34 ) . 1 1/2 pair Butts 1 Bedroom Closet Lock 1 Wall Stop DOOR HARDWARE 08710 10 !0 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations . Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later *r" to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal , storage , and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not 0 install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. Set units level , plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners . Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING 10 Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit . Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as 00 intended for the application made . Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to 0 acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to wo restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors . Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. HARDWARE SCHEDULE General : Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware , " hardware set numbers vo indicated in door schedule , and in the following schedule of hardware sets . Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. Lockset Designs : Provide one of the lockset designs designated below: Entry Locks : Sargent 8105 LNL Entrance Bedroom Locks: Sargent 6137 OSL Classroom Bedroom Closets : Sargent 6115 OSL Passage DOOR HARDWARE 08710 9 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Operating Hardware: Provide manufacturer' s complete sets awl consisting of overhead extruded aluminum track; captive nylon shoe or roller guides ; rubber bumpers in track; and adjustable pivots , hinges , and door aligners all designed to accommodate the number, i0v size , thickness , and weight of door leaves indicated. Provide extra-heavy-duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to e 125 lb. and 4 feet in width with a minimum thickness of 1 inch. Trim Hardware : Provide the following items as needed for operating bifold doors : "' Pulls : White plastic wire pull . HARDWARE FINISHES Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating ( if any) , composition, hardness , and other qualities complying with manufacturer' s standards , but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass , bronze , and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer. " The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156 . 18 , "Materials and Finishes , " including coordination with the traditional U. S . finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products . Rust-Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal , required for exterior work and in areas shown as "High Humidity" areas ( and also when designated with the suffix -RR) , provide 0 . 2 mil thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass , bronze , nickel or chromium plated finishes . PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications , except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect . "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute . NWWDA Industry Standard I . S . 1 . 7 , "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors . " DOOR HARDWARE 08710 8 "" air 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Key Material : Provide keys of nickel silver only. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. No Deliver keys to Owner. LOCKS , LATCHES , AND BOLTS Strikes : Provide manufacturer' s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame , finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. Provide standard ( open ) strike plates for interior doors of residential units where wood door frames are used. Lock Throw: Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and 3/4-inch minimum throw of ' latch for mortise locks. CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES Size of Units : Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers , except as otherwise indicated. no Access-Free Manual Closers : Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117. 1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. DOOR TRIM UNITS Fasteners : Provide manufacturer' s standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. Plastic Plates: Clear acrylic plastic , 1/8 inch thick. HARDWARE FOR BIFOLD DOORS General : Provide manufacturer ' s standard hardware for interior bifold doors when not furnished as part of complete door package. "' DOOR HARDWARE 08710 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Templates : Except for hinges to be installed entirely ( both leaves ) into wood doors and frames , provide only template-produced units . Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes . For wood doors and frames install wood screws . Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots . Hinge Pins : Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins . Interior Doors : Nonrising pins . Number of Hinges : Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height . LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING Existing System: Grandmasterkey the locks to the Owner' s existing Sargent system, with a new masterkey for the Project . Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great-grandmaster) , either new or integrated with Owner' s existing system. „ Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts . Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period, and remove these when directed. Equip locks with high-security cylinders that comply with performance requirements for Grade 1 cylinders as listed in ANSI/BHMA A156 . 5 and that have been tested for pick and drill resistance requirements of UL 437 and are UL listed. Metals : Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze , stainless steel , or nickel silver. Comply with Owner' s instructions for masterke ying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks . Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer ' s key symbol , and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE. " DOOR HARDWARE 08710 6 """ No 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect the other manufacturers that complies with requirements . ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards . Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156 . 1 . Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches : ANSI/BHMA A156 . 2 . Door Controls - Closers : ANSI/BHMA A156 . 4 . Ok Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products : ANSI/BHMA A156 . 5 . Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156 . 7 . Door Controls - Overhead Holders : ANSI/BHMA A156 . 8 . Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156 . 13 . Sliding and Folding Door Hardware : ANSI/BHMA A156 . 14 . ter Auxiliary Hardware : ANSI/BHMA A156 . 16 . Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156 . 18 . MATERIALS AND FABRICATION Base Metals : Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer' s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser ( commercially recognized ) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156 . 18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. 40 Fasteners : Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates , generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws , except as specifically indicated. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish " exposed ( exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. f HINGES AND BUTTS w� DOOR HARDWARE 08710 5 an 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Sargent Manufacturing Company. "" Overhead Closers : no Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware , Div. Black & Decker Corp. Dorma Door Controls International . am International Door Closers, Inc. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co. , Div Newman Tonks, Inc. Norton Door Controls , Div. Yale Security Inc . Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc . Sargent Manufacturing Company. Yale Security Inc . Kick Plates : Baldwin Hardware Corp. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc . Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Hager Hinge Co. Hiawatha, Inc. aw H. B. Ives , A Harrow Company. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company ( Trimco ) . Bifold Door Hardware: we Stanley Hardware , Div. Stanley Works . 00 Thresholds : Hager Hinge Co. ..� National Guard Products , Inc . Pemko Manufacturing Co. , Inc . Reese Enterprises , Inc . Sealeze Corp. Zero International , Inc . SCHEDULED HARDWARE Requirements for design, grade , function, finish, size , and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following : Manufacturer' s Product Designations : The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type '! required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements . Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type , the comparable product of one of .� DOOR HARDWARE 08710 4 W 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Supplier Qualifications : A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the 'Project ' s vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC ) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing . ow PRODUCT HANDLING Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware an supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation ( shop or Project site ) . MAINTENANCE Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner' s continued adjustment , maintenance , and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include , but are not limited to , the following : Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products by one of the following : 40 Butts and Hinges : Bommer Industries , Inc . Cal-Royal Products , Inc . ow Hager Hinge Co. Lawrence Brothers , Inc . McKinney Products Co . ok H. Soss & Company. Stanley Hardware , Div. Stanley Works . Cylinders and Locks: 00 an DOOR HARDWARE 08710 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to ' show compliance with requirements . Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors , frames , and related work to ensure proper size , thickness , hand, function, and finish of door hardware . Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: Type, style, function, size , and finish of each hardware item. Name and manufacturer of each item. Fastenings and other pertinent information. aw Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame *� schedule . Explanation of all abbreviations , symbols , and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for hardware . Door and frame sizes and materials . Keying information. Submittal Sequence : Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule . Include with schedule the product data, samples , shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware , and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule . Keying. Schedule : Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner' s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. Templates for doors , frames , and other work specified to be factory ' prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated +� requirements . QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware ( latch and lock sets , hinges, closers , etc . ) from a single manufacturer. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 2 ,,� 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY ,r This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing , sliding , and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. This Section includes the following: Hinges. Pivots . Key control system. Lock cylinders and keys. Lock and latch sets . Closers . Protection plates. Bifold door hardware . Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this' Section: Division 8 Section "Wood Doors" . Division 8 Section "Insulated Metal Doors" . SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections . Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware , installation instructions, maintenance DOOR HARDWARE 08710 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect of the corner. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware , operators, accessories , and other window components . Set units plumb, level , true to line , without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place . Set sill members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. ADJUSTING Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping , and to provide smooth operation and a weathertight closure . Lubricate hardware and moving parts . CLEANING Clean interior and exterior surfaces promptly after installation. Take care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes . Remove excess glazing and sealants , dirt , and other substances . Clean glass of preglazed window units promptly after installation. .� Wash and polish glass on both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance . Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces . kw Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked , abraded or damaged during the construction period. 40 PROTECTION Protect window units from damage or deterioration until time of No substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08610 WOOD WINDOWS 08610 8 " 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect conditions in the installation areas . Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing . Provide openings and mortises precut , where possible , to receive hardware and other items . +� Each window unit includes sash, frame , stops, sill ( including undersill or nosing ) , exterior casing and moldings, integral mullions and muntins, hardware , and accessories . Provide weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash. „ For double/single-hung sash, provide weatherstripping only at horizontal rails of operable sash. Provide removable insect screen for each awning unit , with location determined by manufacturer. Preglazed Window Units : Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches , preglaze window units at the shop before delivery, unless preglazing is not available from the fabricator. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing , hardware application, and other work before shipment to the project site , to the maximum extent possible . Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site , provide ample ON, allowance for scribing , trimming , and fitting . FINISHES Wood Finish: Provide the following finish on exposed wood in units : Shop-Primed Units : Provide the fabricator' s standard shop prime coat on exterior and interior wood surfaces . �w+ PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION go Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening is correct and the sill plate is level . Do not proceed with installation of window units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry, and free of excess mortar , sand, and other construction debris. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids , and without offsets at joints . Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches WOOD WINDOWS 08610 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect REPLACEMENT WINDOWS Window Grade : Comply with the requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade 20 . Provide window units that have "tilt-in" feature permitting both sides of the sash to be cleaned from the interior. Hardware : Provide the following equipment and operating hardware : Jamb Liners: Manufacturer' s standard jamb liners . Lock: Cam action sweep lock and keeper on the meeting rail . Lift Handle : Applied sash lifts on bottom rail of lower sash ( 2 per sash) . Pull-down Handles : Applied handles on bottom rail of upper sash ( 2 per sash.) . Color: White . Finish: Provide exterior and interior factory-primed units . Glazing: Standard 1/2" insulating glass. ACCESSORIES Insect Screens : Provide insect screens for each operable exterior ventilator of awning units only. Locate screens on the inside of the window ventilator, depending upon window type. Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable 40 arrangement , with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches . Screen Frames : Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped extruded or ,. formed aluminum members of 0 . 040-inch minimum wall thickness , with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners . Provide removable PVC spline/anchor concealing the edge of the screen frame . Comply with requirements of SMA 1004 . Finish: Anodized aluminum or baked on organic coating in the manufacturer' s standard color. so FABRICATION go General : Provide the manufacturer ' s standard fabrication of units . Comply with indicated standards . Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units . Comply with requirements of referenced standards for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity WOOD WINDOWS 08610 6 ` ° pa 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Glass and Glazina Materials : Provide the manufacturer' s standard clear, sealed, insulating safety glazing material that complies with ANSI Z97 . 1 and the "Glass and Glazing" Section. Glazing Seal : Provide the manufacturer' s standard extruded vinyl or butyl glazing gasket providing weather weathertight seal . AWNING WINDOWS on Window Grade : Comply with the requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade 20 . w Hardware : Provide awning window units with the following equipment and operating hardware: Operating Device: Gear-type rotary operator located on the .jamb at the sill . 40 Hinges : Concealed friction hinge ( 2 per ventilator ) located on each jamb near the top rail . so Limit Device : Manufacturer' s standard limit device ( 2 per ventilator) located on each jamb. Cam latch or other latching hardware with lever handle or pull . Provide latch with eye for pole operation for operable sash located more than 6 feet above the floor. DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOWS Window Grade : Comply with the requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade 20 . Provide window units that have "tilt-in" feature permitting both sides of the sash to be cleaned from the interior. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware : Sash Balances : Manufacturer' s standard concealed, counterbalancing mechanism-type sash balances ( 2 per sash ) . Lock: Cam action sweep lock and keeper on the meeting rail . Lift Handle : Applied sash lifts on bottom rail of lower sash ( 2 per sash) . Pull-down Handles : Applied handles on bottom rail of upper sash ( 2 per sash) . WOOD WINDOWS 08610 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect w PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide ..� window units by one of the following : Prime-Coated Wood Window Units : Marvin Windows. MATERIALS General : Comply with requirements of NWWDA I . S . 2 . Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber that has been kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and is free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots , pitch pockets and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch wide by 2 inches long . Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with NWWDA I . S. 4 . Anchors . Clips . and Accessories : Fabricate anchors , clips and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel , or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with the requirements of ASTM B 633 for SC 3 ( severe ) service condition; provide strength sufficient to withstand design pressure indicated. Fasteners : Comply with NWWDA I . S . 2 for fabrication and with manufacturer' s recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners . w Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation. Hardware: Manufacturer' s standard hardware , necessary to operate , tightly close , and securely lock windows . Do not use aluminum in .�. frictional contact with other metals . Provide solid white-metal hardware with a special coating finish with plated steel or brass/bronze operating bars and rods . Compression Weatherstripping : Provide compressible weatherstripping , .. designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, completely concealed when sash is closed. WOOD WINDOWS 08610 4 "" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect label certifying compliance with requirements of NWWDA I . S . 2 . Wood Window Standard: Comply with NWWDA I . S . 2 for standards of performance and fabrication workmanship for wood windows . Safety Glass Standard: Provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97 . 1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. Provide safety glass permanently marked with the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council ( SGCC ) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association ( FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with the appropriate certification label of the either the Insulating Glass Certification Council ( IGCC ) or the Associated Laboratories , Inc . (ALI ) . Provide the certification label either on spacers or at least one component pane of each unit . Single Source Responsibility: Provide windows produced by a single fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those required. Design Concept : The drawings indicate window sizes , profiles , and dimensional requirements and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Window units by other manufacturers having equal performance characteristics may be considered, provided deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect . The burden of proof for equality is on the proposer. PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements : Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings . Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. WOOD WINDOWS 08610 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Performance Requirements ( Grade 20 Windows ) : Each required window unit shall comply with the following performance requirements : Air Infiltration: Not more than 0 . 34 cfm per sq. ft. of overall frame area at an inward test pressure of 1 . 57 lbf per sq. ft . Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test .w method at an inward test pressure of 2 . 86 lbf per sq. ft . Structural Performance: No glass breakage , damage to hardware , permanent deformation that would impair operation of the unit , or residual deflection greater than 0 . 4 percent of the span at a positive ( inward ) and negative ( outward ) test pressure of 20 lbf per sq. ft. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections : Product data for each type of wood window required, including : Standard construction details and fabrication methods. Profiles and dimensions of individual components . Data on hardware, accessories , and finishes . Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning exterior surfaces . Shop drawings for each type of window specified. Layout and installation details , including anchors, within existing wall configuration. Samples for Verification Purposes : The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of hardware and accessories. Certificatio.n: Provide certification by a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency certifying that each required type and grade of window complies with performance requirements indicated. 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE up Manufacturer Qualifications : Firms whose windows have been certified under the NWWDA "Hallmark Program" for wood window units are listed in the current NWWDA "Membership and Product Directory" and comply 40 with requirements indicated. Provide only wood window units bearing a NWWDA "Hallmark Program" am WOOD WINDOWS 08610 2 no 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 08610 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following prime-coated wood window types : Double-Hung Window Units . Awning Window Units . Replacement Window Units . Related Sections : The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Interior and exterior wood trim that is not included as part of the wood window units is specified in Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry. " Joint sealing between wood windows and adjacent materials is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers . " Field painting factory prime-coated wood windows is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting . " Storm windows are specified in another Division 8 section. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS_ Standards: Performance requirements for structural performance , air infiltration, and water penetration for wood windows are those specified in NWWDA I . S . 2 "Industry Standard for Wood Window Units . " Testing : Manufacturer' s stock units of each grade of required wood window shall have been tested by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, ASTM E 547 for water penetration, and ASTM E 330 for structural performance . Test samples shall comply with requirements in NWWDA I .S . 2 for test sample sizes and methods . WOOD WINDOWS 08610 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 ee WOOD DOORS 08211 ' "' 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type , " size , location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads . so Reject doors with defects . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have „W been corrected. INSTALLATION: �•�+ Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. Manufacturer' s Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer' s instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. Job-Fit Doors : Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors . Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. .� Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors : Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads ; 1/16" per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors ; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges . Prefit Doors : Fit to frames for uniform clearance 'at each edge . Factory-Primed Doors : Restore primer before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site . Field-Finished Doors : Refer to the following for finishing requirements : Division-9 section "Painting" . ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. Finished Doors : Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial WOOD DOORS 08211 4 """ 16 North Maple Street Renovations Ed Ambroz , Architect uW MANUFACTURERS : Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to, the following : Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following : Hollow Core Doors: American Door Manufacturers Masonite Corporation Michigan Door Company Mohawk Flush Doors INTERIOR WOOD DOORS: Hollow Core Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements : Faces : Hardboard. Construction: IHC ( Institutional hollow core ) . FABRICATION: ,u„ Fabricate wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements : Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels : Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting . ,fie. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates . SHOP PRIMING: Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division-9 !'* section "Painting" . �. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: WOOD DOORS 08211 3 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced no standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store , Handle , Finish, Install , and Maintain Wood Doors" , as well as with manufacturer ' s instructions. am Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames , and hardware , using temporary, removable or concealed markings . PROJECT CONDITIONS : Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project ' s geographical location: Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-5-3 "Moisture Content" . Referenced WIC quality standard including "Section 1 - General Information - Technical Bulletin" . so WARRANTY: General : Warranties shall be in addition to , and not a limitation "" of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents . Door Manufacturer' s Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer' s standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and .. Contractor , agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped ( bow, cup or twist ) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers , or do not conform to tolerance 0 limitations of referenced quality standards . Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required so due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging . Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after .m date of Substantial Completion. Hollow Core Interior Doors : MW One year. Contractor' s Responsibilities : Replace or refinish doors where ow Contractor ' s work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer' s warranty. no PART 2 - PRODUCTS WOOD DOORS 08211 2 ,,. on 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 08211 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section. SUMMARY: Extent and location of each type of wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules . Types of doors required include the following : Hollow core doors with hardboard faces . Shop-priming of wood doors is included in this section. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware for wood doors is included in this section. �w Finish painting of frames and doors is specified in Division 9 section Painting . SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Door manufacturer' s technical data for each type of 00 door , including details of core and edge construction, trim, and factory-finishing specifications . ON QUALITY ASSURANCE: Quality Standards : Comply with the following standards : an NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of NWWDA I . S. 1 Series . For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors . PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage , WOOD DOORS 08211 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 �w INSULATED METAL DOORS 08110 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Shop Priming: Clean, treat , and paint exposed surfaces of door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint . PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION: Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size , location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. Reject doors with defects. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION: Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. Manufacturer' s Instructions : Install doors to comply with manufacturer' s instructions and of referenced standards . Fit metal doors within tolerances of referenced standards . .� Factory-Primed Doors: Restore primer before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. " Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements : Division-9 section "Painting" . ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate ..� freely. Finished Doors : Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. INSULATED METAL DOORS 08110 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect FABRICATION: + " Fabricate doors to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle . Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer' s plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site . Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows: Fabricate exposed ends of doors and panels from cold-rolled galvanized steel , 24 gauge. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel . Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16- gage inverted steel channels . Exposed fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips head fasteners for exposed screws and bolts. Thermal-Rated Doors: ®. Type : Insulated steel door, pre-hung on wood frame, complete with hardware. Door: Faces shall be bonderized steel , factory primed with vinyl strip locked in flanged skin edges or interlocking full steel edges with foam filled edge joints. Core : Adhesively bonded polyurethane foam, minimum R value of 14 . Frame: Kiln-dried ponderosa pine . Hardware: Manufacturer' s standard hinges, bottom sweep and thermal break threshold. Style: As indicated on drawings . Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame prepartion for hardware . Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings , or if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder' s Hardware" , published by the Door and Hardware Institute . INSULATED METAL DOORS 08110 3 4W 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames , and *R hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings . PROJECT CONDITIONS: Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the manufacturer' s requirements applicable to project ' s geographical location. .., PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS : Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide products of one of the following: Exterior Insulated Steel Doors: Benchmark, General Products Co. , Inc. Access I , Overhead Door Corporation Peachtree Stanley Products Perma-Door, American Standard MATERIALS : *�* Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial qualtiy carbon steel pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568 . Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel , complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568 . Galvanized Steel Sheets • Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526 , with ASTM A 525 , G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. ** Inserts_ , Bolts and Fasteners : Manufacturer' s standard units, except hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls , complying with ASTM A 153 , Class C or D as applicable. Shop-Applied Paint: Primer to be rust-inhibitive enamel or paint , either air-drying or baked, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. INSULATED METAL DOORS 08110 2 ,, on 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 08110 - INSULATED METAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL �w RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY: Extent and location of each type of wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. Types of doors required include the following: Thermally insulated metal exterior doors, frames , and sidelights. Shop-priming of doors is included in this section. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware for doors is included in this section. Finish painting of frames and doors is specified in Division 9 section Painting . SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Door manufacturer' s technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim, and factory-finishing specifications. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Quality Standards : Comply with the following standards : Provide doors and frames complying with STeel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ( SDI-100 ) and as herein specified. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Protect doors during transit , storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations . Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate " " INSULATED METAL DOORS 08110 1 P0 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Protect Joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07901 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS General : Comply with joint sealant manufacturer' s printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated , except where more stringent requirements apply. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials , applications , and conditions indicated . Installation of Sealant Backings: Install .Joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of .. sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers . Do not stretch, twist , puncture , or tear joint fillers. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to ..� sealant application and replace with dry material . Installation of Sealants : Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each ,joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed . Tooling of Nonsag Sealants : Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated , to eliminate air Pockets , and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint . Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to ,joint . Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. . Provide concave Joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 62 , unless otherwise indicated. CLEANING Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints .Au occur. PROTECTION .. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 6 �. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces , and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates . A Masking Tape : Nonstaining , nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine joints indicated to receive Joint sealants , with Installer present , for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances , and other conditions affecting ,joint sealant performance . Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints : Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of ,joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements : Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant , including dust , paints (except for permanent , protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer ) , old joint sealants , oil , grease , waterproofing , water repellents , water, surface dirt , and frost . Clean concrete , masonry, and similar porous ,joint substrate surfaces by brushing , grinding, blast cleaning , mechanical abrading , or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with ,joint sw sealants . Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 40 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete . Joint Priming : Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience . Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer' s recommendations . Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces . Masking Tape : Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears . Remove tape immediately ter after tooling without disturbing joint seal . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 5 M" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Silicone Emulsion Sealant : Provide product complying with go ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792 , with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent . Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , latex joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include , but are not limited to, the following : Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant , " Dow Corning Corp. Sanitary Silicone Rubber Sealant : one-part , low modulus sanitary ... silicone rubber sealant , for use in interior wet locations , at bathrooms and kitchens. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , latex joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include , but are not limited to , the following : 4M Sanitary Silicone Rubber Sealant : General Electric Company UM Dow Corning Corporation JOINT SEALANT BACKING so General : Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining ; are compatible with joint substrates , sealants , .ft primers and other joint fillers ; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing . Plastic Foam Joint Fillers : Preformed, compressible , resilient , nonstaining , nonwaxing , nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size , shape , and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance : Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and ..� gas , nonoutgassing in unruptured state. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Material recommended by ,joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as �. determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests . Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces : Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials , free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in JOINT SEALANTS 07901 4 f" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions : Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions : When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside �•* the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. When joint substrates are wet . Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. Joint Substrate Conditions : Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates . a.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS. GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants , joint fillers , and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with �w joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience . Colors : Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following : Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer' s full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer' s standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated,' including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type , Grade , Class , and so Uses . LATEX JOINT SEALANTS General : Provide manufacturer' s standard one-part , nonsag , mildew-resistant , paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. !! ' JOINT SEALANTS 07901 3 XW 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide ioint sealants for interior applications that have been OR produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates . ,. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. MP Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants . ' Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are *■° suitable for the use indicated. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated , evidencing compliance with requirements specified . QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials : Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to , and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. DELIVERY, STORAGE , AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and .� designation, color, expiration period for use , pot life , curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials . Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer' s recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture , high or low temperatures , contaminants , or other causes. .� JOINT SEALANTS 07901 2 "` 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL go RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations : Exterior Joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: Joints between cast-in-place units and masonry foundations . Joints between frames of doors and windows . Other joints as indicated. Exterior Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: Joints between patio slabs and masonry foundations . Other joints as indicated. Interior .joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of "r new interior doors and windows . Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. Other joints as indicated. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing ..joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing . JOINT SEALANTS 07901 1 .m 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual . " Anchor units of work securely in Im place by methods indicated , providing for thermal expansion of metal units ; conceal fasteners where possible , and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps , joints , and seams em that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. Underlayment : Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed am directly on cementitious or wood substrates , install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment . Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement No where required for waterproof performance. Install continuous gutter guards on gutters , arranged as hinged units wo to swing open for cleaning gutters . Install "beehive"-type strainer-guard at conductor heads , removable for cleaning downspouts . NO CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause aft corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes . Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for No surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. +w END OF SECTION 07600 „X aft . re. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 4 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect stainless steel mesh or fabricated units , with selvaged edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Select materials for compatibility with gutters and downspouts . ww Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet . Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822 , asphaltic . FABRICATED UNITS General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible . Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other reco;nized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance , with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. 00 Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material . Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning , buckling , and tool marks , true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Seams : Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams , and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. Expansion Provisions : Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof , form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges , not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant ( concealed within joints ) . Separations : Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. Shop Finish, Rain Drainage : Provide manufacturer' s standard baked-on white acrylic shop finish on sheet metal rain drainage units ( gutters , downspouts, and similar exposed units ) ; 1 . 0-mil dry film thickness . PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS General : Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer' s installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA on FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS Copper: ASTM B 370 ; temper H00 ( cold-rolled ) except where temper 060 is required for forming ; 16 oz . ( 0 . 0216-inch thick) except as otherwise indicated. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 , alloy 3003 , temper H14 , AA-C22A41 clear " anodized finish; 0 . 032-inch thick ( 20 gage ) except as otherwise indicated. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32 ) , with rosin flux. Fasteners : Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non- corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12 , solvent-type bituminous mastic , •• nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat . Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers . " Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior .. nonmoving joints including riveted joints . Adhesives : Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet . Paper Slip Sheet : 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper. .. Metal Accessories : Provide sheet metal clips , straps , anchoring devices , and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive , size and gage required for performance. Gutter and Conductor-Head Guards : 20-gage bronze or nonmagnetic FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 2 ON 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect OW SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL an PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to work of this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following : 40 Metal counter flashing and base flashing ( if any) . 40 Metal wall flashing. Gutters and downspouts ( rain drainage ) . Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. Elastic flashing . Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system sections as roofing work. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . Product data, Flashing , Sheet Metal , and Accessories : Manufacturer' s technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal , and accessory items : 8-inch-square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces . 12-inch-long samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. Shop drawings showing layout , profiles , methods of joining , and anchorages details , including major counterf lashings , trim/fascia units , gutters , downspouts , scuppers , and expansion joint systems . Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale. aw FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Owens - Corning Fiberglass Corporation, roofing products operating division, Fiberglass Tower, Toledo, OH 43659 . *" The Celotex Corporation, roofing products division, P.O. Box 31602 , Tampa, FL 33631 . Note : Specification is based on GAF data. Provide complete data for manufacturer chosen. System intended for use is based on specification N11MG, for nailable deck, one base ply, one top ply, mop-applied, with granule-surfaced membrane. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify deck is dry, sound, clean and smooth, free of depressions , waves , or projections, properly sloped to eaves. PROTECTION Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. Where work must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. MEMBRANE APPLICATION Install base sheet and membranes and flashings in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL so Correct defects and irregularities. CLEANING 4.0 Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces . In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling cased by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to those instructions. END OF SECTION 07500 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING 07500 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Underwriters ' Laboratories , Inc . (UL) Class A fire hazard classification Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation ( FM) : Roof assembly classification, FM Construction Bulletin 1-28 , class 1 , 1-60 and 1- 90 approvals. SUBMITTALS Product Data: 1 . Submit manufacturer' s complete specifications indicating general requirements, products, and installation procedures. 2 . Submit scaled detail drawings indicating method of attachment , edge conditions , wall conditions, penetrations , and flashings , and conditions specific to this project . DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1 . Store materials in wether protected environment , clear of ground and moisture , in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions . Maintain membranes above 40 degrees F. prior to their installation, or as required by manufacturer. ENVIRONMENTAL RE UIREMENTS Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. .� Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surfaces . Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. To assure good adhesion at lower air temperatures, exercise care to .� maintain bitumen at manufacturer's recommended minimum temperature during installation. PART. 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS GAF Building Materials Corporation, Subsidiary of GAF Corporation, 1361 Alps Road, Wayne, NJ 07470 . MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING 07500 2 «� 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 07500 - MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of modified bitumen roofing work is indicated on the Drawings. Sheet roofing work includes the following : 1 . removal of existing roofing and accessories. 2 . preparation of existing roof deck for new roofing . 3 . installation of new roofing membrane, fleshings , and accessories . Related Sections: Division 6 : Rough and finish carpentry sections . Repair of existing roof deck is work of Division 6 sections. Division 7 : Asphalt Shingles section is not work of this section. REFERENCES Manufacturer' s current catalog and specifications for recommended materials and procedures. NRCA-National Roofing Contractors ' Association Manual . SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Two ply mop-applied modified bitumen membrane system with granular surface finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator: Company well experienced in modified bitumen roofing membrane application approved by the roofing manufacturer. MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING 07500 1 16 North Maple-Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect ow perimeter underlayment at eaves . Extend perimeter underlayment at eaves a minimum of 24 inches inside exterior wall line. In addition to eaves , apply perimeter underlayment at entire +0 perimeter of surfaces to receive asphalt shingles , including ridges, valleys, and rakes. Install asphalt shingles beginning at lower end with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted shingles with tabs removed. Fasten shingles in pattern, with weather exposure , and using number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use No vertical and horizontal chalk lines or premarked underlayment to ensure straight coursing. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. Fasteners at ridges shall be of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated and in accordance with details and recommendations of the "Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual . " ADJUSTING Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials meeting specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 5 •4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect am sizes and configurations required. low PART 3 - EXECUTION so EXAMINATION Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates , so installation tolerances , and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. we PREPARATION , Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive roofing nails. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. No INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer' s installation instructions and ... recommendations, but not less than recommended by "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual . " Felt Underlayment: Apply one layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive asphalt shingles , lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches , end laps a minimum of 4 inches , and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until asphalt shingle application. �.. Provide additional layer of felt underlayment for roofs with slope of 3 inches per foot or more. , Provide additional layer of felt underlayment set in mastic or hot asphalt for roofs with slope of 2-1/2 inches per foot or more. Omit felt underlayment at areas of perimeter underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over perimeter underlayment as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 2 inches. Perimeter/Edge Underlayment: Apply minimum 36-inch-wide layer of ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect ASPHALT SHINGLES Three-Dimensional Strip Shingle , UL Class "A" : Mineral-surfaced rw granule overlay pattern, self-sealing , fiberglass-based strip shingle complying with ASTM D 3018 , Type 1 and with ASTM D 3462 . Provide shingles bearing UL Class "A" external fire exposure label and UL "Wind Resistant" label . Weight : minimum 240 lbs. per square. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer' s standard factory precut units to match shingles. Colors , Blends and Patterns: Where manufacturer' s standard products are indicated, provide asphalt shingles with the following requirements: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer' s full +�* range of standard colors , textures, and patterns for asphalt shingles of type indicated. ACCESSORIES Felt Underlavment: No. 15 ; unperforated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226 Type I ; 36 inches wide. Perimeter/Edge Underlavment: Polyethylene-sheet-backed rubberized asphalt membrane, 40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following : "Bitutrene Ice & Water Shield, " W. R. Grace & Co. "Polyken 640 Underlayment Membrane , " Polyken Technologies . "Polyguard Deck Guard, " Polyguard Products, Inc . M Asphalt Plastic Cement: Nonasbestos fibrated asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 4586 , designed for trowel application. Nails: Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel , 11- or 12-gage , sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks , minimum 3/8-inch-diameter head, and of sufficient length to An penetrate 3/4 inch into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Material of nails in contact with flashing shall match materials selected for flashing to prevent galvanic M action. Metal Drip Edge: Minimum 0. 024-inch mill finish aluminum sheet , brake-formed to provide 3-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch Oft fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge . Furnish in lengths of 8 or 10 feet . Metal Flashing : 0 . 024-inch mill finish sheet aluminum, job-cut to ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 3 No 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining , or other physical damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for job site storage, handling, and protection. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Conditions : Proceed with Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit Work to be installed in compliance with manufacturer' s recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. EXTRA MATERIALS Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents . Furnish quantity of full-size asphalt shingles equal to 5 percent of amount installed. no WARRANTY Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by ■ft manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of shingles beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents . Warranty period is 25 years after date of Substantial Completion. rA PART 2 - PRODUCTS .M MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements , provide asphalt shingles by one of the following: Celotex Corporation. CertainTeed Corporation. '" Elk Corporation. GAF Building Materials Corporation. Georgia Pacific. oft Manville Roofing Systems Division. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corporation. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes asphalt shingles for steep roofs. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for underlayment and wood framing. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for flashing , gutters , and other sheet metal work. SUBMITTALS 00 General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified, including details ". 4 of construction relative to materials , dimensions of individual components , profiles , textures , and colors . Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer' s sample finishes showing full range of colors and profiles available. Samples for verification purposes in form of two full-size units of each type of shingles required. QUALITY ASSURANCE UL Listing : Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL for Class and Rating indicated for each shingle type required. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 40 Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer' s unopened bundles or containers with labels intact . ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 1 ps fft 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect causes . Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. OR END OF SECTION 07210 we on 4" BUILDING INSULATION 07210 7 on 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical .. anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units . Seal Joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing ) insulation units by applying adhesive , mastic , or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place . Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive , mastic , or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. ..� Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces , such as windows and doors. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume ( to a density of approximately w 2 . 5 pcf ) . Foam insulation is to be applied to voids where rigid insulation is applied. INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS .m General : Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates , including those filled with loose fiber insulation. ..,, Seal vertical ioints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs . Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges , at perimeter of wall openings , and at lap joints ; space fasteners 16 inches o. c . Seal overlapping ioints in vapor retarders with adhesives or tape per .e vapor retarder manufacturer' s printed directions . Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates . Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. .. Seal Joints caused by pipes , conduits , electrical boxes , and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before ,.. concealment by other work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor retarder. on, PROTECTION General : Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from oft damage due to harmful weather exposures , physical abuse , and other BUILDING INSULATION 07210 6 +rr 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present , for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. !A" Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent the escape of insulation. Provide bronze or stainless steel screen ( inside ) where openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Comply with insulation manufacturer' s instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions , consult manufacturer' s technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions , and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement . Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness , unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness . ws INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION On vertical surfaces , set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions . Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated , complying with manufacturer' s recommendations . If no specific method is BUILDING INSULATION 07210 5 ON 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Edge condition: straight edge where board abuts framing , and „ tongue-and-groove for continuous applications . Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I ( blankets without membrane facing ) ; and as follows : Mineral Fiber Type : Fibers manufactured from glass . Surface Burning Characteristics : Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50 , respectively. Loose Cellulose Fiber Insulation: Provide Class I U.L. approved loose cellulose fiber to settled depths indicated on drawings . Minimum R-value to be 3 . 7 per inch. VAPOR RETARDERS Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397 , 6 . 0 mils thick, with a maximum permeance rating of 0 . 13 perms. ' Tape for Vapor Retarder: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to , the following : Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , provide one of the following : "Griffolyn T-65 , " Griffolyn Div. , Reef Industries , Inc . AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors, or substrates . Protection Board : Premolded, semi-rigid glass fiber board, 1/8 inch thick, formed under heat and pressure , standard sizes . Crack Sealer: Polymeric insulating foam in aerosol dispenser .. designed for filling voids . ow am BUILDING INSULATION 07210 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect wi. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to , the following : Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements , provide insulation products of one of the following: 40 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Amoco Foam Products Co. DiversiFoam Products. Dow: The Dow Chemical Company. UC Industries, Inc . 04 Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: CertainTeed Corp. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. Manville: Building Insulations Div. , Manville Sales Corp. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp. Manufacturers of Loose Cellulose Fiber Insulation: Northern Cellulose Products, Inc. Manufacturers of Urethane Foam Insulation: Insta-Seal , Insta-Foam Products , Inc. Dow Chemicals , U. S .A. Poly-cel , W. R. Grace INSULATING MATERIALS General : Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards . Preformed Units : Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer' s standard thicknesses , widths, and lengths . Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation with closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for type indicated; with 5-year aged r-values of 5 . 4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F ( 4 . 4 and 23 . 9 deg C ) , respectively; and as follows: Type IV, 1 . 6 pcf min. density, unless otherwise indicated. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 75 and 450 , respectively. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect products with requirements including r-values (aged values for , plastic foam insulations ) , fire performance characteristics, perm ratings , water absorption ratings , and other properties , based on comprehensive testing of current products . Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in effect for Project . QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Surface Burning Characteristic : ASTM E 84 . Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119 . Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136 . .. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products : Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture , soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer ' s recommendations for handling , storage , and protection during installation. .., Protect plastic insulation as follows : Do not expose to sunlight , except to extent necessary for period .. of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times . Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time . Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as VA rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS BUILDING INSULATION 07210 2 „� 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect SECTION 07210 - .BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. 40 SUMMARY Or This Section includes the following : Insulation under slabs-on-grade . Loose cavity wall insulation. Plastic board insulation. ow Building insulation in batt form. Loose-fill building insulation. Vapor retarders . Related Sections : The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: DEFINITIONS Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation 06 products are designated by "r-values , " they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity ( k-values ) . Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. w. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . Product data for each type of insulation product specified. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation BUILDING INSULATION 07210 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Match color and grain pattern across joints . Install trim after drywall joint finishing operations are completed. w Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. Apply battens and window trim as detailed on the drawings . Conceal fasteners to greatest extent practical by countersinking and filling by concealing with applied trim or battens as detailed. Do not nail through overlapping pieces. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on the drawings and recommended by siding manufacturer. Finish: Apply finish within 2 weeks of installation. " ADJUSTING Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects . Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. CLEANING Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces . . PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion . , END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I* PREPARATION Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by manufacturer. Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for surface preparation and application in Section "Painting . " INSTALLATION , GENERAL Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. Install finish carpentry plumb, level , true , and aligned with O. adjacent materials . Use concealed shims where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level . ON Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/8 inch maximum offset for reveal installation. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems that may be in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails . Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails . Finish in accordance with specified requirements . STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS Install with minimum number of joints practical , using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available . Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim and rails . Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint . Use scarf ,joints . for end-to-end joints . Plane back of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints if required. so FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 5 ON 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 4WD Moldings for Transparent Finish: N-Grade . Moldings for Painted Finish: P-Grade . MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Stainless steel , noncorrosive aluminum or hot-dip galvanized nails , in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer. Countersink nails and fill surface where face nailing is unavoidable . No Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws , and other anchoring devices of type , size , material , and finish required for *p application indicated to provide secure attachment , concealed where possible . am Countersink nails , fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable . Adhesives : Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for adhesives . Flashing : Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. FABRICATION Wood Moisture Content : Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer' s recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas . Provide finish carpentry with moisture content that is compatible with Project requirements . Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions , profiles and details M. indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following : Lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness : 1/16 inch. VW Lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness : 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 4 .. 0* 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect go WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with go grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade , species , moisture content at time of surfacing , and mill . err For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece , or omit grade stamps entirely and ON provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. ON EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS Trim and Rails : For trim and rails in form of boards and worked "d products , provide lumber complying with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species . Species : Western red cedar; WCLIB OR WWPA. Grade: B and Better, 1 and 2 Clear VG (Vertical Grain ) . Texture : Surfaced ( smooth) . Lumber for Transparent Finish ( Stained or Clear ) : Solid lumber stock. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock. INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS Trim and Rails : For trim in form of boards and worked products , provide lumber complying with the following requirements . Species : Ponderosa Pine; WWPA. Select Grade: C Select. Finish Grade: Superior. Texture : Surfaced ( smooth) . +der Lumber for Transparent Finish ( Stained or Clear ) : Solid lumber stock. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock. Wood Molding Patterns: For stock molding patterns included in Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers Association WM 7 and graded under WM 4 , provide the following grade based on finish indicated and fabricated from species specified: 40 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect panels for each species and cut , finished on one side and one .� edge , with one-half of exposed surface finished. UALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications : Arrange for installation of finish �* carpentry by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project . DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery and Storage : Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels . Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas . If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas , store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas . PROJECT CONDITIONS w Environmental Conditions : Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer' s and installer' s coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for finish carpentry during its storage and installation. Weather Conditions : Proceed with finish carpentry only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit exterior finish carpentry to be installed in compliance with manufacturer ' s recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. PART 2 --PRODUCTS MATERIALS , GENERAL Lumber Standards : Comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards .� Committee Board of Review. Inspection Agencies : Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. ... FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS �w Drawings and general provisions of Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Exterior standing and running trim and rails . Interior standing and running trim and rails . Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring , blocking , exterior board sheathing , and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation under siding. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for flashing and other sheet metal work. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants . Division 9 Section "Painting" for back priming and finishing of finish carpentry. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . Product data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components , profiles, textures , and colors . Samples for verification purposes of the following : Lumber and panel products for non-factory-applied finish, 50 square inches for lumber and 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for go FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 1 an 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Notching : Notch stringers to receive treads , risers and MW supports ; leave at least 3-1/2 inches of effective depth. Stringer Spacing: Not less than 3 stringers for each V -0" .e clear width of stair. Fabricate stair framing not to exceed the following variations '" between treads and risers within each flight of stairs : AdJacent Treads and Risers : 3/16 inch. Between Largest and Smallest Treads and Risers : 3/8 inch. INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS General : Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30 , "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial , " for types of construction panels and applications indicated. Fastening Methods : Fasten panels as indicated below: Subflooring : Glue and nail to framing throughout . Sheathing : Nail to framing . Underlayment : Nail to subflooring . Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring. EXTERIOR BOARD SHEATHING Install boards with end joints staggered over supports , and with each piece extending over at least 2 spaces between supports . Nail with 8d common nails , spaced 2 per support for board widths of 6 inches and less , 3 per support for widths of 8 inches and more . END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 we 12 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect partitions not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Install solid blocking ( 2 inches thick by depth of joist ) over supports . Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch metal strap anchors spaced not more than 8 feet o. c . Extend ' anchors at least 4 inches into masonry, turn up 4 inches and extend over and fasten to 3 joists . N Under .iamb studs at openings , install solid blocking between joists. Under non-load-bearing partitions , install double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. Install bridging of type indicated below between ,joists where 00 nominal depth-to-thickness ratio exceeds 6 , at intervals of 8 feet . Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel cut nominal 1-inch by vMs 4-inch lumber, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists , or Solid wood bridging 2 inches thick by depth of joist , end nailed to joist , or Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer ' s directions . RAFTER AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING Ceiling Joists : Install ceiling joists with crown up and to comply with requirements specified above for floor joists . Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. Rafters : Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use special metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing , and support with metal hangers . Install collar beams (ties ) as shown. Locate below ridge member, one-third of distance to ceiling joists . Cut ends to fit slope and nail to rafters. Install special framing as shown for eaves , overhangs , dormers and similar conditions . STAIR FRAMING Install stair framing members of size, space , and configuration indicated or, if not otherwise indicated , to comply with the ow following requirements: Stringer Size : 2 inches by 12 inches minimum. wr ON ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 11 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Frame openings with multiple studs and headers . Install nailed .M header members of thickness equal to width of studs . Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs . For header openings , refer to header schedule indicated on the drawings , and as recommended by N. F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing . " For nonbearing partitions, install double-jamb studs ( one ,jack stud, one king stud) . For load-bearing partitions , install double-,jamb studs for openings 6 feet and less in width, and triple-jamb studs ( two jack studs , one king stud ) for wider openings . "W Install diagonal bracing in stud framing of exterior walls , except as otherwise indicated. Brace both walls at each external corner , go full story height , at a 45 degree angle, using either a let-in 1 by 4 or 2 by 4 blocking or metal diagonal bracing . Omit bracing where following types of sheathing are indicated . No Plywood sheathing or corner bracing , 4-feet-wide panels vertically. .o Gypsum sheathing , 4-feet-wide panels vertically. Fiberboard sheathing, intermediate type , 4-feet-wide panels •* vertically. Diagonal board sheathing . No FLOOR JOIST FRAMING on General : Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal , or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows : To wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal framing anchors . To wood supporting members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown, with metal joist hangers . Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist "° hangers ; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 4 feet . Do not notch in middle third of Joists ; limit notches to 1/6-depth Of ,joist , 1/3 at ends . Do not bore holes larger than 1/3-depth of joist or locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. Install solid blocking ( 2 inches thick by depth of joist ) at ends of joists unless nailed to header or bearing member. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams , girders or ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 10 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible wr materials , accurately fitted to close furred spaces . Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall : Install 1-inch by 3-inch furring at 16 inches o . c . WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing , " unless otherwise indicated. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with the following : National Evaluation Report No. NER-272 for pneumatic or mechanical driven staples , P-Nails , and allied fasteners. Published requirements of manufacturer of metal framing anchors . "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with N. F. P.A. "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. " Massachusetts State Building Code . Do not splice structural members between supports . Firestop concealed spaces of wood framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at the ceiling line of the top story. Where firestops are not automatically provided by the framing system used, use closely fitted wood blocks of nominal 2-inch-thick lumber of the same width as framing members . STUD FRAMING General : Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel . Install single bottom plate and double top plates using 2-inch- thick members whose widths equal that of studs ; except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions . Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction. For interior partitions and walls install 2-inch by 4-inch wood studs spaced 16 inches o .c . Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs . Install miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials , fixtures , specialty items , and trim. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 9 va 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION, GENERAL Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough ' carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement . Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines , with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit . Correlate location of furring , nailers , blocking , grounds , and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. a Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes . Use common wire nails , unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between " members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. WOOD GROUNDS NAILERS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS Install wood grounds, nailers , blocking , and sleepers where shown " and where required for screeding or attachment of other work . Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading . Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces , unless otherwise indicated. Where possible , anchor to formwork before concrete placement . Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. WOOD FURRING Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings . Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. *�! ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 8 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 9" publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. Galvanized Steel Sheet : Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A 446 , Grade A ( structural quality) ; ASTM A 526 ( commercial quality) ; or ASTM A 527 ( lock-forming quality) ; as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in ground contact , or in area of high relative humidity, and where indicated. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS General : Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative- ""` treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 ( Lumber) and C9 ( Plywood) . Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0 . 25 pcf. For interior uses , after treatment , kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content , respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following : Wood cants , nailers , curbs , equipment support bases , blocking , stripping , and similar members in connection with roofing , flashing , vapor barriers , and waterproofing . Wood sills , sleepers , blocking , furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete . Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade . Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with zround or fresh water with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0 . 40 pcf. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible . If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4 . Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and r discard damaged or defective pieces . ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 7 ,a 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Plywood Backing Panels : For mounting electrical or telephone equipment , provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1 , in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR UNDERLAYMENT Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring : For underlayment under 19/32 inch in indicated thickness , provide plywood • construction panels with fully sanded face complying with the following requirements : Grade Designation: APA UNDERLAYMENT EXT. FASTENERS General : Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Comply with recommendations of applicable standards , including Federal Specifications for all anchoring devices . Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather , in ground contact , or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel . Nails , Wire , Brads , and Staples : FS FF-N-105 . ,. Power Driven Fasteners : National Evaluation Report NER-272 . Wood Screws : ANSI B18 . 6 . 1 . Lag Bolts : ANSI B18 . 2 . 1 . w Bolts : Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307 , Grade A ; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers . METAL FRAMING ANCHORS General : Provide metal framing anchors of type , size , metal , and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following : Current Evaluation/Research Reports : Provide products for which model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project . Allowable Design Loads : Provide products for which manufacturer ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 „ 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect No MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER General : Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases , cant strips , bucks , nailers , blocking, furring, grounds , stripping , and similar members. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No . 2 Boards" per SPIB rules. CONSTRUCTION PANELS , GENERAL Construction Panel Standards_: Comply with PS 1 "U. S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions , with APA PRP-108 . Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory- marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements . CONCEALED PERFORMANCE-RATED CONSTRUCTION PANELS General : Where construction panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications , provide APA Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements designated under each application for grade designation, span rating , exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable ) , and thickness . *a Subflooring : APA RATED SHEATHING. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. Span Rating: As required to suit joist spacing indicated. Roof Sheathing : APA RATED SHEATHING. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. Span Rating : As required to suit rafter spacing indicated. CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect For light framing ( 2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide ) provide ." the following grade and species : "Stud" grade . Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules . For structural light framing ( 2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide ) , provide the following grade and species : "No . 2" grade . Hem-Fir or Douglas Fir graded under WWPA rules . .A. For structural framing ( 2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider) , provide the following grade and species : "No . 2" grade . Hem-Fir or Douglas Fir graded under WWPA rules . ,.. Species and grades indicated must comply with the following requirements for species group as defined in Table 8 . 1a of N. F. P.A. National Design Specification, for extreme fiber stress w. in bending "Fb" for single and repetitive members , and for modulus of elasticity "E" : "Fb" of 1250 psi , and "E" of 1 , 200 , 000 psi . For exposed framing lumber provide material complying with the following requirements : Definition: Exposed. framing refers to dimension lumber that is not concealed by other construction and is indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. Grading : Material hand-selected at factory from lumber of species and grade indicated below that complies with "Appearance" grade requirements of ALSC National Grading Rule ; issue inspection certificate of inspection agency for selected AP material . Spruce-Pine-Fir, "Select Structural" grade per NLGA rules . BOARDS Exposed Boards : Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, Provide the following : Moisture Content : 19 percent maximum, "S-DRY" or KD-19 . r. SWhere painted finish is indicated, provide "No . 1 Boards" per PIB rules , "Select Merchantable Boards" per WCLIB rules , or "No . 2 Common Boards & Better" per WWPA rules . ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Delivery and Storage : Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels ; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials . *W For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals , place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r + LUMBER, GENERAL + Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards o Committee' s (ALSO ) Board of Review. Inspection Agencies : Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: RIS - Redwood Inspection Service . NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority ( Canadian) . SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. Grade Stamps : Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading go rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade , species , moisture content at time of surfacing , and mill . For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece ; or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions . Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20 , for moisture content aw. specified for each use . Provide dressed lumber, S4S , unless otherwise indicated. .► Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness , unless otherwise indicated. DIMENSION LUMBER ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 3 go 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Engineered wood products . Underlayment . Metal framing anchors . Construction adhesives . Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade .R selected for each use as well as design values approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer' s instructions for handling , storing , installation, and finishing of treated material : For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative ., retained, and compliance with applicable standards . For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture „ content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site . Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code VW organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction evidencing compliance of the following wood products with specified requirements and building code in effect for Project . Engineered wood products . Metal framing anchors . Power driven fasteners . QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility for Engineered Wood Products : Obtain each type of engineered wood products from one source from a single manufacturer. Testing Laboratory Qualifications : To qualify for acceptance , an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect ' s satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699 , that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the progress of the Work. ,. DELI_VERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .0 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 VM 2 a . 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect of SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS "M Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY !*� This Section includes the following : Framing with dimension lumber. e Framing with engineered wood products . Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking . Wood furring . n Exterior Exposed Board Sheathing . Subflooring . Underlayment . Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural wr, carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. Division 7 Section "Thermal & Moisture Protection" for plastic board sheathing . DEFINITIONS Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . Nw Product data for the following products : ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 1 w 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect permitted under any circumstances . Joint Pointing: Rinse masonry oint surfaces with water to remove any dust and mortar particles. Time application of rinsing so that, at time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off, and joint *s* surfaces are damp but free of standing water. Apply first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in .. layers not greater than 3/8" until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint-hard before applying next layer. .�. After .joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in 3 layers with each of first and second layers filling approximately 2/5 of joint depth and third layer the remaining 1/5 . Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges recess final layer slightly from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces , or to featheredge mortar. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints , unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for not less than 72 hours . Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry allow mortar to harden not less than 30 days before beginning cleaning work. .� FINAL CLEANING: After mortar has fully hardened thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter using stiff nylon or bristle brushes and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. Use of metal scrapers or brushes will not be permitted. Use of acid or alkali cleaning agents will not be permitted. END OF SECTION 04500 " MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 8 "w �r 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect After adhesive has cured fully, further anchor stone fragments larger than 6"x 6" x 6" in any dimension with 1/4" diameter plain stainless steel rods set into 1/4" diameter holes drilled at a 45 deg . downward angle through face of stone . Center and space anchor rods not more than 5" nor less than 3" apart and not less than 2" from any edge . Insert rods not less than 2" into backing stone and 2" into fragment with end countersunk at least 3/4" from exposed face of stone. Clean any residual adhesive from edges . Wet stone and fill any chipped areas and drill holes with patching mortar. Avoid featheredging. Furnish patched areas to match texture of, and be level with adjoining surrounding stone surfaces. Keep patching mortar damp for 72 hours. STONE PATCHING: Remove loose particles, soil , debris , oil and other contaminants from existing stone units at locations indicated by cleaning with stiff brush. Brush coat stone surfaces with mortar-to-stone adhesive to comply with manufacturer' s directions. Place patching mortar in layers no thicker than 2" . Roughen surface + of each layer to provide key for next. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until mortar has set . Unacceptable patches are defined as those with hairline cracks or showing separation from stone at edges. Remove patches and refill to provide patches free of those defects . REPOINTING EXISTING MASONRY: Joint Raking: ww Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths but not less than 1/2" nor less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. ** Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace any masonry units which become damaged. Cut out old mortar by hand with chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated. Power operated rotary hand saws and grinders will not be MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect .brick. If cutting is required use mortar driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp unchipped edges. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay brick which have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption ( suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing. Tool exposed mortar Joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. Repoint new mortar ioints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, except rake out joints before mortar sets. A. STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT: no Carefully remove by hand at locations indicated any stone which has deteriorated, shifted, or is damaged beyond repair. Remove mortar, loose am � particles and other debris from salvaged stone and stone surrounding removed units in preparation for resetting. Replace removed stone with salvaged stone, where possible, or with on new stone matching existing, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated. Tool joints after setting to match joints of surrounding stone. Repoint new mortar joints to comply with requirements for .. repointing existing masonry, except rake out joints before mortar sets . so STONE REPAIR: Carefully remove loose stone fragments in areas which are indicated for repair. Reuse only pieces of spalled stone which are in sound condition. Remove soil , loose stone particles, mortar, and other debris and foreign material from surfaces to be bonded of both fragment and building stone from which it was removed by cleaning with stiff brush. Apply adhesive to comply with adhesive manufacturer' s directions . " Coat bonding surface of building stone with stone-to-stone adhesive completely filling all voids and covering all surfaces . Fit stone fragments onto building stone while adhesive is still tacky and hold fragment securely in place until adhesive has cured. .w MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 6 "�" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Pointing Mortar for Brick: One part white portland cement , 2 parts lime and 6 parts colored mortar aggregate. Pointing Mortar for Stone: One part white portland cement, 1 part lime, 6 parts colored mortar aggregate. Rebuilding Mortar: Same as pointing mortar. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270 , Proportion Specification, Type N, unless otherwise indicated with cementitious material content limited to portland cement-lime. Patching Mortar for Stone: Provide mix composed of white and gray cement combined with lime and selected aggregates to produce color matching color of existing stone. Proportion mix with 2 parts cement, 2 parts lime and 6 parts aggregate. 40 Grout: ASTM C 476 . PART 3 - EXECUTION "• PREPARATION: Protect Persons, motor vehicles , surrounding surfaces of building whose masonry surfaces are being restored, building site , and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry restoration work. BRICK REMOVAL AND REBUILDING: Brick Removal : Carefully remove by hand at locations indicated any brick which are w damaged, spalled or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in manner to permit replacement with full size units . Do not use power tools . Support and protect masonry indicated to remain which surrounds removal area. Salvage as many whole, undamaged bricks as possible. Remove mortar, loose particles and soil from salvaged brick by p, cleaning with brushes and water. Store brick for reuse. Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose debris in preparation for rebuilding . Brick Rebuilding: OR Install new or salvaged brick to replace removed brick. Fit replacement units into bonding and coursing pattern of existing gs MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect closely as possible. Water: Clean, free of oils , acids , alkalis and organic matter. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404 . MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: .� Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: Two-part polyester resin stone adhesive with a 15-30 minute cure at 70 deg. F ( 21 deg.C) , in formulation ( knife or flowing grade ) recommended by adhesive manufacturer for type of stone repair indicated, and in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from tinted or standard colors available from adhesive manufacturer. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Akemi" adhesives distributed by Wood and Stone, Inc . , 7567 Gary Road, Manassas , VA 22110 . Mortar-to-Stone Adhesive: High modulus, high strength, moisture insensitive epoxy adhesive with a pot life of 30 minutes at 40 deg. F ( 4 deg.C) . Product : Subject to compliance with requirements , provide "Sikadur Hi-Mod Epoxy, Sikastix 370" ; Sika Chemical Corporation. Stone Anchors : Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to .. match existing in size and type . Fabricate anchors and dowels from AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel . MORTAR MIXES : General : Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate .. material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight . Do not measure by shovel , use known measure. Mix materials in a clean mechanical batch mixer. Mixine Pointinr� Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix which will retain its form when pressed into a ball . Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1-to-2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar of desired consistency is reached. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material . Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise ' indicated. Mortar Proportions : ON MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 4 no 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING: Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 40, Repair existing masonry including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. am Rake-out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. � Repoint existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored. Point existing mortar .joints of masonry indicated to be "' restored. on PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40, MASONRY MATERIALS: Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories , including units for lintels, arches, corners, and other special 40 ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. go Provide units with color, surface texture and size to match existing brick work and with physical properties equal to those of selected existing units. Provide units with color, surface texture , and physical properties to match Architect ' s sample. ** Stone: Provide natural building stone of type (classification) and with color, surface texture and size to match existing. go MORTAR MATERIALS: Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I . For stonework and other masonry indicated, provide non-staining white cement complying with staining requirement of ASTM C 91 4W for not more than 0 . 03% water soluble alkali . Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 , Type S. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144 , unless otherwise indicated. Colored Mortar Aggregate : Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color indicated. For pointing mortar provide sand with rounded edges. Match size, texture and gradation of existing mortar as MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect a single source for each type material required ( face brick, stone, cement , sand, etc . ) to ensure match of quality, color, pattern, and texture . .. SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data for each product indicated including recommendations for their application and use . Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. Samples : Submit, for verification purposes , prior to mock-up erection, samples of the following: Each new exposed masonry material to be used for replacing existing materials. Include in each set of samples the full range of colors , colors and textures to be expected in completed work. go DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry materials in suitable packaging . Unload and handle to prevent chipping and breakage. Deliver other materials to site in manufacturer' s original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type and names of products and manufacturers . Protect masonry restoration materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or ground water, and from staining or intermixture with earth or other types of materials. Protect grout , mortar and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flames. Protect liquid components from freezing. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. no PROJECT CONDITIONS : Do not repoint mortar Joints or repair masonry unless air .. temperatures are between 40 deg. F ( 4 deg -C) and 80 deg. F ( 27 deg.C) and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of work. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces . Remove immediately grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. Pr_ otect sills , ledges and projections from mortar droppings. MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 2 """ on 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect so SECTION 04500 - MASONRY RESTORATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections , apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of masonry restoration work is indicated on drawings and in schedules. i. Masonry restoration work includes the following : Repairing new window openings. Infilling existing window openings . Repointing mortar joints. Rebuilding damaged masonry. Joint sealers are specified in a Division-7 section. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to start of general masonry restoration, prepare the following sample panels on building where directed by Architect. Obtain Architect ' s acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with the work. Retain acceptable panels in undisturbed condition, suitably marked, during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Repointing : Prepare 2 separate sample areas of approximately 3 ' high by 6' wide for each type of repointing required, one for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in removal of mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints. Masonry Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of masonry material indicated to be patched, rebuilt or replaced. Erect mock-up panels into an existing wall , unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate quality of materials and workmanship. Source of Materials : Obtain materials for masonry restoration from MASONRY RESTORATION 04500 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect of satisfactory strength is provided. �.. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders , evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete . Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi . Test results will be reported in writing to Architect , Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests . Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement , name of concrete testing service , concrete type and class , location of concrete batch in structure , design compressive strength at 28 days , concrete mix proportions and materials , compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests . Nondestructive Testing : Impact hammer, sonoscope , or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure , as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 , or by other methods as directed . Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. go END OF SECTION 03300 uA CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03,300 17 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect enough water as required for handling and placing . Place dry-pack .. before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete . Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours . Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION General : The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports . Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following , as directed by Architect . Sampling Fresh Concrete : ASTM C 172 , except modified for slump to �. comply with ASTM C 94 . Slump: ASTM C 143 ; one test at point of discharge for each day' s pour of each type of concrete ; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. Air Content : ASTM C 173 , volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete ; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete ; one for each day' s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete . Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F ( 4 deg C ) and below, when 80 deg F ( 27 deg C ) and above , and each time a set of compression test specimens is made . Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31 ; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test , unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required . Compressive Strength Tests : ASTM C 39 ; one set for each day' s pour exceeding 5 cu. yds . plus additional sets for each 50 cu . yds . more than the first 25 cu. yds . of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days , two specimens tested at 28 days , and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required . When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete , conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used . When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds . , Architect may waive strength test if adequate evidence CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 16 P 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect higher than surrounding surface . Repair of Formed Surfaces : Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect . Surface defects , as such, include color and texture irregularities , cracks, spalls , air bubbles , honeycomb, rock pockets , fins and other projections on surface , and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning . Flush out form tie holes , fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair concealed formed surfaces , where possible , that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete . If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete . Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces , such as monolithic slabs , for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope . Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that P" affect durability of concrete . Surface defects , as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0 . 01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling , popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets , and other objectionable conditions . ®. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately "o after completion of surface finishing operations by ,cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete . Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect . Repair defective areas , except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete . Place , compact , and W, finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete . Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in W diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust , dirt , and loose particles . Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No . 16 mesh sieve , using only CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 15 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect General : Formwork not supporting weight of concrete , such as sides of beams , walls , columns , and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F ( 10 deg C ) for 24 hours after placing concrete , provided concrete is .. sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations , and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. RE-USE OF FORMS .n Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split , frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces . Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement , thoroughly clean surfaces , remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints . Align and secure joint to avoid offsets . Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect . MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades , unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place . Mix, place , and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry .. lintels and bond beams where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. Wo CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS so Patching Defective Areas : Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect . ,f„ Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets , voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts , down to solid 'o concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched so with specified bonding agent . Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that , when dr match color surrounding . Provide test areast at inc onspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching . Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 14 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect go CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION fir► General : Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying an excessive cold or hot temperatures . In hot , dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material . Apply in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions after screeding and bull floating , but before power floating and troweling. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting , keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days . Curing Methods : Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing !! compound, by moist curing , by moisture-retaining cover curing , and by combinations thereof , as herein specified. Provide moisture curing by following methods . Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Use continuous water-fog spray. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet . Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges , with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers . Provide curing and sealing compound to exterior slabs , walks, an curbs as follows : Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared ) . Apply uniformly ,00 in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer' s directions . Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete . Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above , as applicable . Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces , such as slabs , floor topping , and other flat surfaces , by application appropriate curing method. REMOVAL OF FORMS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 13 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Hot-Weather Placing : When hot weather conditions exist that would .. seriously impair quality and strength of concrete , place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F ( 32 deg C ) . Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control • temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor' s option. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot , so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete . Fog spray forms , reinforcing steel , and subgrade just before concrete is placed. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures , low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions , when acceptable to Architect . FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete , such as waterproofing , dampproofing , veneer plaster, painting , or other similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material , arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams . Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces , which have received smooth form finish treatment , not later than one day after form removal . Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced . Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process . MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps , and ramps , and elsewhere as indicated. .. Immediately after float finishing , slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route . Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing . �. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 12 "" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Placing Concrete in Forms : Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined we construction joints . Where placement consists of several layers , place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading , rodding, or tamping . Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in 00 accordance with ACI 309 . Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms . Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations " not farther than visible effectiveness of machine . Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set . At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints , until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners . Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface , free of humps or hollows . Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations . Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement . ON Cold-Weather Placing : Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows . Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced on strength that could be caused by frost , freezin actions , or low temperatures. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F ( 4 deg C ) , uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F ( 10 deg C ) and not more than 80 deg F ( 27 deg C ) at point of placement . _Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow . Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials . Do not use calcium chloride, salt , and other materials go containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 11 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect round on each side of insert . After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris . If joint pattern not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet " in either direction. Joint sealant material is specified in Division 7 Sections of **� these specifications . INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS on General : Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for- other work that is attached to or no supported by cast-in-place concrete. Forms for Slabs : Set edge forms , bulkheads , and intermediate .m screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces . Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds . PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES General : Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual , low-VOC, form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer ' s instructions . Coat steel forms with a nonstaining , rust-preventative material . .® Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable . me CONCRETE PLACEMENT Inspection : Before placing concrete , inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel , and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work ; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. General : Comply with ACI 304 , "Recommended Practice for Measuring , Mixing , Transporting , and Placing Concrete , " and as herein specified. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness . If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation • at its final location. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 10 w. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment . 0• PLACING REINFORCEMENT General : Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute ' s recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars , " for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale , earth, ice , and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete . 00 Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement . Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs , runners , bolsters , spacers , and hangers , as approved by Architect. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for ON concrete protection. Arrange , space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations . Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete , not toward exposed concrete surfaces . �s Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable . Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire . Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. JOINTS Construction Joints : Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure , as acceptable to Architect . No Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be .joined with fresh concrete . Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces , such as foundation walls and elsewhere as required. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications. w Contraction ( Control ) Joints in Slabs-on-Gr.o_una: Construe contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth or inserts 1/4 ON inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. Form contraction ,joints by inserting premolded plastic , , „ hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface . Tool slab edges 4�" CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 9 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. Ready-Mix Concrete : Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 , and as specified . .�., When air temperature is between 85 deg F ( 30 deg C ) and 90 deg F ( 32 deg C ) , reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes , and when air temperature is above 90 deg F ( 32 deg C ) , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes . PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders �*► with placement of forms and reinforcing steel . FORMS ► General : Design, erect , support , brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral , static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads . Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size , shape, alignment , elevation, and position. Maintain ww formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347 . Construct forms to sizes , shapes , lines , and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment , location, grades , level , and plumb work in finished structures . Provide for openings , offsets , chamfers , blocking , screeds , anchorages and inserts , and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes . Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste . Fabricate_ forms for easy removal without hammering or prying .� against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces . Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place 4" concrete with bottom forms only. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood , metal , PVC , or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth .o lines and tight edge joints . Provisions for Other Trades : Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades . Determine size and location of openings , recesses , and chases from trades providing such items . Accurately place and securely support items built into forms . "1e Cleaning and Tightening : Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips , wood , sawdust , dirt , . or other debris just before concrete is placed . Retighten forms CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 8 ' 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer' s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits : Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing , deicer chemicals , or hydraulic pressure : 4 . 5 percent (moderate exposure ) ; 5 . 5 percent ( severe exposure ) 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate . Other concrete ( not exposed to freezing, thawing , or hydraulic pressure ) or to receive a surface hardener: 2 percent to 4 percent air. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer' s directions . Water-Cement Ratio : Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement (W/C ) ratios as follows : Subjected to freezing and thawing ; W/C 0 . 45 . Subjected to deicers/watertight ; W/C 0 . 40 . Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers ; W/C 0 . 40 . Slump Limits : Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows : Ramps , slabs , and sloping surfaces : Not more than 3 inches . Reinforced foundation systems : Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches . Concrete containing HRWR admixture ( Superpiasticizer ) : Not more than 8 inches after addition of HRWR to site-verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete . Other concrete : Not more than 4 inches . +' CONCRETE MIXING Job-Site Mixing : Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes , but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu . yd. , increase minimum 1-i/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof . Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date , mix type , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 7 .m 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect "SBR Latex , " Euclid Chemical Co . "Daraweld C, " W. R. Grace & Co . "Hornweld, " A. C. Horn, Inc . "Everbond , " L & M Construction Chemicals , Inc . "Acryl-Set , " Master Builders Inc . "Intralok, " W. R. Meadows, Inc . "Sonocrete , " Sonneborn-Rexnord. Wo "Stonlock LB2 , " Stonhard, Inc . no PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as 'r specified in ACI 301 . If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs . The testing facility shall not ■M be the same as used for field quality control testing . Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight . Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect . Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties , as indicated on drawings and schedules : 3000-psi , 28-day compressive strength ; W/C ratio , 0 . 58 .. maximum ( non-air-entrained ) , 0 . 46 maximum ( air-entrained ) . AdJustment to Concrete Mixes : Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials , .job conditions , weather, test results , or other circumstances warrant , ,. as accepted by Architect . Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. ADMIXTURES Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture ( Superplasticizer ) in concrete as required for placement and workability. r.A Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F ( 10 deg C ) . Use high-range water-reducing admixture ( HRWR ) in pumped concrete , concrete for industrial slabs , architectural concrete , parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight , and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0 . 50 . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 6 .. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect W. products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to , the following : "A-H 3 Way Sealer, " Anti-Hydro Co . , Inc . "Spartan-Cote, " The Burke Co . "Conspec #1 , " Conspec Marketing & Mfg . Co . "Hardtop, " Cormix. "Day-Chem Cure and Seal , " Dayton Superior Corp. "Eucocure , " Euclid Chemical Co . "Horn Clear Seal , A.C. Horn, Inc . "L&M Cure , " L & M Construction Chemicals , Inc . "Masterkure , " Master Builders, Inc . "CS-309 , " W.R. Meadows , Inc . "LR-151 , " Prokrete Industries . "Kure-N-Seal , " Sonneborn-Rexnord. "Stontop CS2 , " Stonhard, Inc . Water Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 , Type I , Class B. 40 Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : "Conhard, " Conspec Marketing and Mfg . Co . "Safe Cure and Seal , " Dayton Superior Corp. on "Aqua-Cure , " Euclid Chemical Co . "Dress & Seal #18WB, " L&M Construction Chemicals , Inc . "Masterseal W, " Master Builders , Inc . "Intex, " W. R. Meadows , Inc . 00 "Sika Membrane, " Sika Corp. Evaporation Control : Monomolecular film-forming compound applied 00 to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary- protection from rapid moisture loss . Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : "Eucobar, " Euclid Chemical Co . "E-Con, " L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc . "Confilm, " Master Builders , Inc . Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: "Acrylic Bondcrete , " The Burke Co . "Strongbond, " Conspec Marketing and Mfg . Co . "Day-Chem Ad Bond, " Dayton Superior Corp. om CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect "Plastocrete 161 , " Sika Corp. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture ( Super Plasticizer ) : ASTM C 494 , Type F or Type G. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : Super P, " Anti-Hydro Co. , Inc . "PSI Super, " Cormix. "Eucon 37 , " Euclid Chemical Co. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem, " W. R. Grace & Co . "Rheobuild, " Master Builders , Inc . "PSP, " Prokrete Industries . "Sikament 300 , " Sika Corp. Water-Reducing , Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494 , Type E. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to, the following : "Q-Set , " Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co . "Lilco Accelerator, " Cormix. "Accelguard 80 , " Euclid Chemical Co. "Daraset , " W. R. Grace & Co. "Pozzutec 20 , " Master Builders , Inc . Water-Reducing , Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494 , Type D. .. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : "PSI-R Plus , " Cormix. "Eucon Retarder 75 , " Euclid Chemical Co . "Daratard-17 , " W. R. Grace & Co. "Pozzolith R, " Master Builders , Inc . "Protard, " Prokrete Industries. "Plastiment , " Sika Corporation. .s RELATED MATERIALS Granular Base : Evenly graded mixture of fine and coarse aggregates to provide , when compacted, a smooth and even surface below slabs on grade . Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane- forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309 , T ype I , Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0 . 055 gr . /sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft . /gal . Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 4 .� 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Wa plastic protected (CRSI , Class 1 ) or stainless steel protected ( CRSI , Class 2 ) . 40 CONCRETE MATERIALS Portland Cement : ASTM C 150 , Type I . Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618 , Type C or Type F. Normal Weight Aggregates : ASTM C 33 and as herein specified . Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete . For exterior exposed surfaces , do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances . Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect . NO Water: Drinkable . Admixtures . General : Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0 . 1 percent chloride ions . Air-Entraining Admixture : ASTM C 260 , certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures . Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : "Air-Tite, " Cormix. "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co . "Darex AEA" or "Daravair, " W.R. Grace & Co. "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air, " Master Builders , Inc . 00 "Sealtight AEA, " W. R. Meadows , Inc . "Sika AER, " Sika Corp. Water-Reducing Admixture : ASTM C 494 , Type A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements , products that may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to , the following : "Chemtard, " ChemMasters Corp. "PSI N , " Cormix. "Eucon WR-75 , " Euclid Chemical Co . "WRDA, " W.R. Grace & Co . "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed, " Master Builders , Inc . "Prokrete-N , " Prokrete Industries . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 3 WA 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests requiring retesting of rejected materials for installed work , shall be done at Contractor' s expense . PART 2 - PRODUCTS "" FORM MATERIALS 00 Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete : Plywood, metal , metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials , to provide No continuous , straight , smooth, exposed surfaces . Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. no Use overlaid plywood complying with U. S . Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form, " Class I . .. Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports : Paper or fiber tubes . Provide paper or fiber tubes of laminated plies with water-resistant adhesive and wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall am thickness to resist wet concrete loads without deformation. Form Coatings : Provide commercial formulation form-coating no compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces . MR Form Ties : Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties , designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal . Provide units that will o"' leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface . Provide ties that , when removed, will leave holes not larger *� than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface . REINFORCING MATERIALS w. Reinforcing Bars : ASTM A 615 , Grade 60 , deformed . Steel Wire : ASTM A 82 , plain, cold-drawn steel . Welded Wire Fabric : ASTM A 185 , welded steel wire fabric . Supports for Reinforcement : Bolsters , chairs , spacers , and other devices for spacing , supporting , and fastening reinforcing bars and .s welded wire fabric in place . Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications . For exposed-to-view concrete_ surfaces , where legs of supports are in contact with forms , provide supports with legs that are CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies cast-in place concrete , including formwork, reinforcing , mix design, placement procedures , and finishes . Concrete paving and walks are specified in Division 2 . SUBMITTALS General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . Product data for proprietary materials and items , including reinforcement and forming accessories , admixtures , patching compounds , waterstops , joint systems , curing compounds , dry-shake finish materials , and others as requested by Architect . Samples of materials as requested by Architect . Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test . Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor , certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements . on Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. ow QUALITY ASSURANCE „ , Codes and Standards : Comply with provisions of following codes , specifications , and standards , except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: ACI 318 , "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete . " Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute ( CRSI ) , "Manual of Standard Practice . " CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Maintain lawns for not less than the period stated below, and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. Seeded lawns, not less than 60 days after Substantial Completion. If seeded in fall and not given full 60 days of maintenance , or if not considered acceptable at that time , continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn is established. Sodded lawns, not less than 30 days after Substantial Completion. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing , weeding , mowing, trimming , and other operations such as rolling , regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations , operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Architect will , upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in portions as agreeable to Architect , provided each portion of work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site . END OF SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 ' "' 17 MW 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Water newly planted lawn areas. and keep moist until new grass is established. PLANTING GROUND COVER Space ground cover plants as indicated or scheduled . Space ground cover plants not more than 24 inches o.c . Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil . Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water . Water thoroughly after planting , taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils . Mulch areas between ground cover plants ; place not less than 2 inches thick. MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK Install wood headers and edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes spaced not more than 3 feet o .c . , and driven at least 1 inch ` below top elevation of header or edging . Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging , and clinch point of each nail . Install steel edging where indicated. Anchor with steel stakes spaced not more than 3 feet o .c . , and driven at least 1 inch below top elevation of edging . Place gravel beds where indicated . Compact soil subgrades before placing gravel . Lay 8-mil polyethylene plastic film continuously over compacted subgrade prior to placing gravel . Overlap edges 4 inches at .� joints between sheets . MAINTENANCE "` Benin maintenance immediately after planting . Maintain trees , shrubs , and other plants until final acceptance , but in no case , less than following period: 60 days after Substantial Completion of planting. Maintain trees, shrubs , and other plants by pruning , cultivating , and weeding as required for healthy growth. Restore planting .. saucers . Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 16 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect war furrows to near-level to prevent washing in heavy rains . Space plugs 12 inches apart in both directions. Space plugs 18 inches apart in both directions . on Water plus with fine spray immediately after planting . go SPRIG PLANTING NEW LAWNS Plant individual root clusters with roots and portions of stem buried in soil , but do not cover growing tips . Firm soil around sprigs after planting. Space sprigs 6 inches apart in both directions . Space sprigs 12 inches apart in both directions . Space sprigs 24 inches apart in both directions . Water sprigs immediately after planting and keep moist by frequent watering until well rooted. RECONDITIONING EXISTING LAWNS Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor ' s operations including storage of materials and equipment and movement of vehicles . Also recondition existing lawn areas where minor regrading is required. Provide fertilizer, seed or sod and soil amendments as specified for new lawns , and as required, to provide a satisfactorily reconditioned lawn. Provide new topsoil , as required, to fill low spots and meet new finish grades . Cultivate bare and compaqted_ areas thoroughly to provide a satisfactory planting bed. Remove diseased and unsatisfactory lawn areas ; do not bury into so soil . Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor' s operations , including oil drippings , stone , gravel , and other loose building materials . Where substantial lawn remains , but is thin, mow, rake, aerate if compacted , fill low spots , remove humps , and cultivate soil , fertilize , and seed. Remove weeds before seeding , or if extensive , apply selective chemical weed killers as required. Apply a seedbed mulch, if required, to maintain moist condition. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 15 an 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect No Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil , roll lightly, and water with a fine spray. Protect seeded slopes against erosion with erosion netting or other methods acceptable to the Architect . Protect seeded areas against erosion by spreading specified lawn mulch after completion of seeding operations . Spread uniformly to form a continuous blanket not less than 1-1/2 inches loose measurement over seeded areas . Anchor mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at the rate of 10 to 13 gallons per 1000 sq. ft . Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of construction or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas . .W HYDROSEEDING NEW LAWNS Mix specified seed , fertilizer, and pulverized mulch in water, a using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. No Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded. Rate of application as required to obtain specified seed sowing rate . SODDING NEW LAWNS Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping . Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted ,joints . Butt ends and sides of sod strips ; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses . Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with 4W subgrade . Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass . Anchor sod on slopes with wood pegs to prevent slippage . Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting . w, PLUG SODDING NEW LAWNS Cut plugs 2 inches to 4 inches square, retaining maximum amount of soil on roots . Do not tear or rip plug from sod mass . Keep roots moist and plant plugs immediately after cutting . Plant plugs in holes or furrows . On slopes ( if any ) , contour LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 14 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 1 inch below adjacent finish landscape grades . Spread out roots without tangling or turning up to surface . Cut injured roots clean; do not break. Set container grown stock, as specified, for balled burlapped stock, except cut cans on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove bottoms of wooden boxes after partial backfilling so as not to damage root balls. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching . Mulch pits , trenches, and planted areas . Provide not less than following thickness of mulch, and work into top of backfill and finish level with adjacent finish grades . Provide 1 inch thickness of mulch. Apply anti-desiccant , using power spray, to provide an adequate film over trunks , branches , stems , twigs and foliage . If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved when in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery before moving and spray again 2 weeks after planting. Prune , thin out , and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice . Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect , do not cut tree leaders , and remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees , if any. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. to Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning . Wrap tree trunks of 2 inches caliper and larger . Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping . Guy and stake trees immediately after planting , as indicated . SEEDING NEW LAWNS Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage . "0 Sow seed using a spreader or seeding machine . Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour. Distribute seed evenly over entire area by sowing equal quantity in 2 directions at right angles to each other. Sow not less than the quantity of seed specified or scheduled . LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 13 wo 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect n settlement . as EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS Excavate pits , beds , and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. For bare root trees and shrubs , make excavations at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to allow for setting of roots on a layer of compacted backfill and with collar set at same grade level as in nursery, but 1 inch below finished grade at site . Allow for 9 inch setting layer of planting soil mixture . For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs ) , make excavations at least half again as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus following allowance for setting of ball on a layer of compacted backfill : Allow for 3 inch thick setting layer of planting soil mixture . For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted to size of container width and depth. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations . Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill . up Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow water to percolate out prior to planting. w* PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS aw Set balled and burlapped ( B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades . Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms . When set , place as additional backfill around base and sides of ball , and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets . When excavation is approximately 2/3 full , water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill . Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill . Set bare root stock on cushion of planting soil mixture . Spread roots and carefully work backfill around roots by hand and puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers of soil mixture above roots . Set collar LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 12 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 40 soil being prepare for lawns . Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mix into upper 2 inches of topsoil . Delay ew application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days . "Schedule of Planting Soil Mixture Requirements" indicating required rate of fertilizer application, is attached at end of this section. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose , uniformly fine texture . Roll , rake , and drag lawn areas , remove ridges and fill depressions , as required to meet finish grades . Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns . Do not create a muddy soil condition. Restore lawn areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise disturbed, after fine grading and prior to planting . �. PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches using a culti-mulcher or similar equipment . Remove stones measuring over 1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove sticks , stones , rubbish, and other extraneous matter. $0 Spread planting soil mixture to minimum depth required to meet lines , grades , and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement . Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of planting soil required. Work into top of loosened sub grade to create a transition layer, then place remainder of the planting soil . 00 Dig beds not less than 8 inches deep and mix with specified soil amendments and fertilizers . s Remove 8 inches to 10 inches of soil and replace with prepared planting soil mixture. 10 Planters: Place not less than 4 inch layer of gravel in bottom of planters, install filtration/separation fabric and fill with planting soil mixture consisting of 1 part topsoil , 1 part course sand, 1 part peat humus , and 3 lbs. dolomitic limestone per cubic ON yard of mix. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation 1-1/2 inches below top of planter allowing for natural on LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 � 11 No 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect specified . Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow aw placing of planting soil within a few days . "Schedule of Planting Soil Mixture Requirements" is attached at end of this section. 00 For pit and trench type backfill , mix planting soil prior to backfilling , and stockpile at site . up For planting beds and lawns , mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting . 'm Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer. No Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-loving plants . Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer ( other than that constituting ate+ a portion of complete fertilizers ) directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling. PREPARATION FOR PLANTING LAWNS Loosen subgrade of lawn areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches . �» Remove stones measuring over 1-1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove sticks , roots , rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Spread top soil to minimum depth required to meet lines , grades , and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement . Add specified soil amendments and mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil . Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of top soil required . Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil . Add specified soil amendments and mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil . Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating , grading , or stripping operations , prepare soil for lawn planting as follows : Till to a depth of not less than 6 inches . Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high areas and fill in depressions . Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture , free of lumps , clods , stones , roots and other extraneous matter. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas , remove existing grass , vegetation and turf. Dispose of such material outside of Owner' s property. Do not turn existing vegetation over into LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 .. 10 on 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect so Size Range : 3 inches maximum, 1-1/2 inches minimum. Size Range : 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4 inch minimum. Size Range : 3/8 inch maximum, 1/8 inch minimum ( pea gravel ) . Color: Readily-available natural gravel color range . Anti-Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat , rye , oats , or barley. of Anti-Desiccant : Emulsion type , film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants . Deliver in manufacturer' s fully identified containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions . Plastic Sheet : Black, weather-resistant polyethylene sheeting , 0 . 008 inch ( 8-mils ) thick. Filtration/Separation Fabric : Water permeable filtration fabric of fiberglass or polypropylene fabric . Wrapping: Tree-wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide , designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing. Stakes and Guys : Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or redwood, free of knot holes and other defects . Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted , pliable galvanized iron wire , not lighter than 12 ga. with zinc-coated turnbuckles . Provide not less than 1/2 inch diameter rubber or plastic hose , cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material , and size to protect tree trunks from damage by wires . PART 3 - EXECUTION «. PREPARATION - GENERAL Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Architect ' s acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments as may be required. PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL Before mixing , clean topsoil of roots , plants , sods , stones , clay lumps , and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. ow Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates an LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 9 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect no Sod Plugs : Provide strongly rooted sod not less than 2 years old, s„ free of weeds and undesirable native grasses and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted ( viable , not dormant ) . Provide in form suitable for cutting into plugs not less than 4 inches thick. Provide sod plugs composed principally of the ow following : Manilagrass ( Zoysia matrella) . .R Sod Sprigs : Provide healthy living stems with attached roots of following grasses : wo Bermuda grass ( Cynodon dactylon) . Carpetgrass (Axonopus offinis ) . ., Centipedegrass ( Eremochloa ophiuroides ) . .r� St . Augustinegrass ( stenotaphrum secundatum ) . Manilagrass ( Zoysia matrella ) . GROUND COVER Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers .� or integral peat pots and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60 . 1 for the pot size shown or „■. listed. MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS ° Wood Headers and Edging: Of sizes shown and following wood species . Southern Pine , pressure treated with water-borne preservative for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22 . .. Provide wood stakes of the same species , 2" by 2" by ed Bing .24" long g and with galvanized nails for anchorin headers and Steel Edging: Commercial steel edging of size shown on drawings fabricated in sections with loops pressed from or welded to face of w sections at 2 ' - 6" o. c . to receive stakes . Provide tapered steel stakes 16 inches long . Finish edging sections and stakes with manufacturer' s standard green-black paint . w.+ Gravel : Water-worn, hard, durable gravel , washed free of loam, sand , clay, and other foreign substances , and of following size range and color ( depending upon application ) : No LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 Am 8 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Provide balled and burlapped ( B&B) deciduous trees . Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60 . 1 for container stock. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and on with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60 . 1 for type and height of shrub required. Provide bare root deciduous shrubs , except where shown as "B&B" , provide balled and burlapped shrubs. Container gown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. 0-0 Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens : Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types , such as globe , dwarf, cone, pyramidal , broad upright , and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. GRASS MATERIALS Grass Seed: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America. Provide seed mixture composed of grass species , proportions and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed, as specified. wrt "Schedule of Grass Seed Requirements" is attached at end of this section. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old , free of weeds and undesirable native grasses , and -machine cut to pad thickness of 3/4 inch ( plus or minus 1/4 inch ) , excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted (viable , not dormant ) . Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5 percent deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable . Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10 percent of pad will be rejected. Provide sod composed principally of following : *0 Kentucky Bluegrass (Poa pratensis ) . LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Sand: Clean, washed sand , free of toxic materials . Perlite : Conforming to National Bureau of Standards PS 23 . Vermiculite : Horticultural grade , free of toxic substances . Sawdust : Rotted sawdust, free of chips , stones , sticks , soil , or toxic substances and with 7 . 5 pounds of nitrogen uniformly mixed «+ into each cubic yard of sawdust . Manure: Well rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust , or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or ingredients harmful to plants . Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees , shrubs , or plants and consisting of one of the following: - w. Shredded hardwood Ground or shredded bark Wood chips ** Pine needles Peanut , pecan and cocoabean shells Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients : For trees and shrubs , provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash. .,. For lawns , provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than 1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1 , 000 sq. ft . of lawn area and not less than 4 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent potassium. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth ; at least 50 percent of nitrogen to be organic form. +.. PLANT MATERIALS , Quality: Provide trees , shrubs , and other plants of size , genus , species , and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60 . 1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock" . Deciduous Trees : Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching configuration recommended by ANSI Z60 . 1 for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 6 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect "W warranty period; unless , in opinion of Architect , it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season. Another warranty inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if any, to determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement ( per tree , shrub or plant ) will be required at end of warranty period , except for losses or replacements due aw to failure to comply with specified requirements . PART 2 - PRODUCTS TOPSOIL Topsoil will be stockpiled for re-use in landscape work. If quantity of stockpiled topsoil is insufficient , provide additional topsoil as required to complete landscape work. Provide new topsoil that is fertile , friable , natural loam, surface soil , reasonably free of subsoil , clay lumps , brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots , stumps , stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at project site . Obtain ur topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches . Do not obtain from bogs or marshes . SOIL AMENDMENTS Lime : Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates with a minimum of 30 percent magnesium carbonates , ground so that not less than 90 percent passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve . Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade . Peat Humus : Finely divided peat , so completely decomposed and free of fibers that its biological identity is lost . Provide in granular form, free of hard lumps and with pH range suitable for me intended use . Bonemeal : Commercial , raw, finely ground; 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid. Superphosphate : Soluble mixture of treated minerals ; 20 percent available phosphoric acid. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect time . wo JOB CONDITIONS .A Utilities : Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage . Hand excavate , as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is aw mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill , adverse drainage conditions , or obstructions , notify Architect before planting . Am SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Planting Time : Proceed with, and complete landscape work as .m rapidly as portions of site become available , working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required . Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for up each type of plant material required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide ON maintenance from date of substantial completion. Coordination with Lawns : Plant trees and shrubs after final grades 00 are established and prior to planting of lawns , unless otherwise acceptable to Architect . If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY ■• Warranty lawns through specified lawn maintenance period, and until final acceptance . Warranty trees and shrubs through specified maintenance period, and until final acceptance . Warranty trees and shrubs , for a period of one year after date of Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others , or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer' s control . Remove and replace trees , shrubs , or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities . Manufacturer' s or vendor' s certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials . Label data substantiating that plants , trees, shrubs and wr planting materials comply with specified requirements. Seed vendor' s certified statement for each grass seed mixture go required, stating botanical and common name , percentages by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species . *►► Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule , indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site . Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing , after documentation of reasons for delays . " Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period( s ) . DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Packaged Materials : Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight , analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site . Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping . Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips. Trees and Shrubs : Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs . Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Architect . Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches , or destroy natural shape . Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade , protect from weather and mechanical damage , and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture . Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting w LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not ow obtainable , submit proof of non-availability to Architect , together with proposal for use of equivalent material . Analysis and Standards : Package standard products with "" manufacturer' s certified analysis. For other materials , provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists , am wherever applicable . Topsoil : Before delivery of topsoil , furnish Architect with written statement giving location of properties from which topsoil MR is to be obtained, names and addresses of owners , depth to be stripped, and crops grown during past 2 years . Trees , Shrubs and Plants : Provide trees , shrubs , and plants of quantity, size , genus, species , and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60 . 1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock" . Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease , insects , eggs , larvae , and defects such as knots , sun-scald, injuries , abrasions , or disfigurement . Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag .� bearing legible designation of botanical and common name . Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name . Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread , and label with number to assure symmetry in planting . Inspection : The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting , for compliance with requirements for genus , species , variety, size , and quality. Architect retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems , insects , injuries and latent defects , and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site . SUBMITTALS ON General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . ' Plant and Material Certifications : LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 02900 -_._LANDSCAPE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. NOTE: Portions of this Work pertain to Allowance for planting ! " materials. Refer to drawings and other divisions for work included in base contract and work covered under Allowance . w In general , base bid covers all materials in this section, except plants , including lawns . Plants and lawns are part of Allowance section. Ow SUMMARY M This Section includes provisions for the following items : Trees. „0 Shrubs . Plants. Ground cover. Lawns. ow Soil amendments . Initial maintenance of landscape materials . Related Sections : The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. �r Excavation, filling , and rough grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings is specified in Division 2 Section, "Earthwork. " QUALITY ASSURANCE Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. Source Quality Control : General : Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities . Comply with regulations I'M applicable to landscape materials . LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect sooner than 28 days after placement, to clean, dry concrete free of oil , dirt, and other foreign material . Apply curing and sealing compound at a maximum coverage rate of 300 s . f. per gallon. Apply antispalling compound in 2 sprayed applications. First application at rate of 40 sq. yds. per gal . ; second application, 60 sq. yds. per gallon. Allow complete drying between applications. REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. A. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations , dirt, and other foreign material just before final inspection. END OF SECTION 02520 sr� PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect No Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a ' metal cap or other temporary material . Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. Fillers and Sealants : Comply with requirements of applicable .� Division 7 sections for preparation of joints , materials, installation, and performance. CONCRETE FINISHING After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by �. screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft . straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. Work edges of slabs , gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool , and round to 1/2-inch radius , unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as follows: Broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic . Repeat operation if �* required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect. On inclined slab surfaces , provide a coarse , non-slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic . Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal , clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect . CURING Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections . Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist-curing methods. Antispalling Treatment : Apply treatment to concrete surfaces no PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 6 go 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Straighten bends, kinks , and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats. Place concrete in 2 operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete , strike off, and screed. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to Architect . JOINTS General : Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction) , and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints , unless otherwise indicated. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows : Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. e Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-section forms. Where load transfer-slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of each dowel bar is free to move . Expansion Joints : Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs , catch basins , manholes, inlets , structures , walks, and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. Locate expansion joints at 50 feet o . c . for each pavement lane unless otherwise indicated. w Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .M forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement . �+ Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: , Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet . Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot to drain. REINFORCEMENT Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE PLACEMENT General : Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. *� Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies , reinforcement , or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels , and joint devices. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between �. transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury. Fabricated Bar Mats : Keep mats clean and free from excessive rust , and handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 00 Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements , products which may be incorporated in the work include , but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: "J-40 Bonding Agent" ; Dayton Superior Corp. "Weldcrete" ; Larsen Products. "Intralok" ; W.R. Meadows. "Everbond" ; L & M Construction Chemicals . "EucoWeld" ; Euclid Chemical Co. "Hornweld" ; A. C. Horn. "Sonocrete" ; Sonneborn-Contech. " "Acrylic Bondcrete" ; The Burke Co. CONCRETE MIX. DESIGN. AND TESTING Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and testing , and quality control and as herein specified. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate , water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture ( superplasticizer) , air-entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: Compressive Strength: 3000 psi , minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. Slump Limits: 8 inches minimum for concrete containing high- range water-reducing admixture ( superplasticizer) ; 3 inches for other concrete. Air Content : 5 to 8 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION SURFACE PREPARATION Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas an need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. FORM CONSTRUCTION Set forms to required grades and lines , braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect horizontal and vertical alignment until removal . Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects . Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric , ASTM A 185 . Furnish in flat sheets , not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect . Concrete Materials : Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers. Antispalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with AASHTO M-233 . Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type I , Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss no more than 0. 055 gr. /sq. cm. when .� applied at 200 sq. ft. / gal . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,P q , provide one of the following: "Masterseal" ; Master Builders . "A-H 3 Way Sealer" ; Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co. "Ecocure" ; Euclid Chemical Co. Clear Seal" ; A. C. Horn. "J-20 Acrylic Cure" ; Dayton Superior. "Sure Cure" ; Kaufman Products Inc. "AR -30" W.R. Meadows. "Spartan-Cote" ; The Burke Co. „ "Sealkure" ; Toch Div. - Carboline . "Kure-N-Seal" ; Sonneborn-Contech. "Polyclear" ; Upco Chemical/USM Corp. "L&M Cure" ; L & M Construction Chemicals. " "Klearseal" ; Setcon Industries . "LR-152" ; Protex Industries. "Hardtop" ; Gifford - Hill . Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. SUMMARY Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings, including walkways and pavement. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3 . Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7 . SUBMITTALS Provide samples, manufacturer' s product data, test reports, an materials' certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers. QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. JOB CONDITIONS Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Coordinate with requirements for "Temporary Facilities" specified in Division 1 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect am Removal from Owner' s Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material , trash, and debris, and dispose of it off Owner' s property. Remove excess excavated material , trash, debris, and waste ' materials and dispose of it off Owner' s property. END OF SECTION 02200 ' WA EARTHWORK 02200 12 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to Architect. Paved Areas Subgrade : Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2 ,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building " slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2 , 000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests . Foundation Wall Backfill : Perform at least two field density tests at locations and elevations as directed. If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained. EROSION CONTROL Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. MAINTENANCE Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances . Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish) , add backfill material , compact , and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS Removal to Designated Areas on Owner' s Property: Transport acceptable excess excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile soil or spread as directed by Architect . Transport waste material , including unacceptable excavated material , trash, and debris to designated spoil areas on Owner' s property and dispose of as directed. EARTHWORK 02200 11 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. m PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE General : Subbase course consists of placing subbase material , in �** layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. Refer to other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. Grade Control : During construction, maintain lines and grades of subbase course. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section .�. and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. When a compacted subbase course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less , place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers , except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL w' Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 ( sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167 ( rubber balloon method) , as applicable. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 2922 , providing that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556 . In conjunction with each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017 . If field tests are performed using nuclear methods , make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect . Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities . Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of EARTHWORK 02200 10 on 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. Under lawn or unpaved areas , compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum density. Under walkways, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. ' Moisture Control : Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material . Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations . ear Remove and replace , or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing , harrowing , or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. GRADING General : Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades . Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding . Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0 . 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade , and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0 . 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line , s grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge . EARTHWORK 02200 9 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Removal of concrete formwork. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material , compacted by hand-operated tampers . Before compaction, moisten or aerate each laver as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. �.. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures , piping , or conduit to required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure , piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift . Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements : Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557 : Under structures , building slabs , and pavements, compact top EARTHWORK 02200 8 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. For pipes or conduit less than-6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil . COLD WEATHER PROTECTION Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. BACKFILL AND FILL General : Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. Under gassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material . Under walks and pavements, use subbase material , satisfactory excavated or borrow material , or a combination. Under slabs, use drainage fill material . Under piping and conduit and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of "" unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit bottom 90 degrees of cylinder. r .Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall footings . Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing . Concrete is specified in Division 3. * ! Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits , but not until completion of the following: Acceptance of construction below finish grade including , where applicable, dampproofing , waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Inspection, testing , approval , and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. EARTHWORK 02200 7 40 .o 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system so components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place, grade , and shape stockpiles for proper drainage . Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill . EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0 . 10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services , and other construction and for inspection. Excavations for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections , elevations and grades as indicated. TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide .� ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil . Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below , EARTHWORK 02200 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Do not perform rock excavation work until material to be excavated has been cross-sectioned and classified by Architect. Such excavation will be paid on basis of Contract Conditions relative to changes in work. Rock payment lines are limited to the following: Two feet outside of concrete work for. which forms are required, except footings. One foot outside perimeter of footings. 40 In pipe Crenches, 6 inches below invert elevation of pipe and 2 feet wider than inside diameter of pipe, but not less than 3 feet minimum trench width. Outside dimensions of concrete work where no forms are required. Under slabs, 6 inches below bottom of concrete slab. STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS General : Comply with local codes, ordinances , and requirements of go agencies having jurisdiction. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances , and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling . Shoring and Bracing : Provide materials for shoring and bracing , such as sheet piling, uprights , stringers, and cross braces, in so good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Provide permanent steel sheet piling or pressure-creosote timber sheet piling wherever subsequent removal of sheet piling might permit lateral movement of soil under adjacent structures. Cut off tops a minimum of 2 ' -6" below final grade and leave permanently in place . DEWATERING Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing 'w0 into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. "* Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms , undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades go and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps , well points, EARTHWORK 02200 5 op 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect MW Drainage Fill : Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel , with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch .4 sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. Backfill and Fill Materials : Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXCAVATION Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade �* elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. Excavation Classifications : The following classifications of .� excavation will be made when rock is encountered: Earth Excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible on surface ; underground structures, utilities , and other items indicated to be demolished and removed; together with earth and other materials encountered * that are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. Rock excavation for trenches and pits includes removal and disposal of materials and obstructions encountered that cannot .� be excavated with a track-mounted power excavator, equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 215C LC, and rated at not less than 115 HP flywheel power and 32 , 000-pound drawbar pull and equipped with a short stick and a 42-inch wide, short tip radius rock bucket rated at 0 . 81 cubic yard (heaped) capacity. Trenches in excess of 10 feet in width and pits in excess of 30 feet in either length or width are classified as open excavation. Rock excavation in open excavations includes removal and disposal of materials and obstructions encountered that cannot be dislodged and excavated with modern, track-mounted, heavy- duty excavating equipment without drilling, blasting, or ripping . Rock excavation equipment is defined as Caterpillar Model No. 973 or equivalent track-mounted loader, rated at not less than 210 HP flywheel power and developing minimum of 45 , 000-pound breakout force (measured in accordance with SAE J732 ) . Typical of materials classified as rock are boulders 1/2 cu. yd. or more in volume, solid rock, rock in ledges, and rock- " hard cementitious aggregate deposits. Intermittent drilling , blasting, or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of .. material encountered will be classified as earth excavation. EARTHWORK 02200 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PROJECT CONDITIONS Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Architect, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures , utilities, sidewalks , pavements , and other facilities from damage caused by settlement , lateral movement, undermining , washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOIL MATERIALS Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. Subbase Material : Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel , crushed stone, crushed slag, and natural or crushed sand. EARTHWORK 02200 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect of conditions . If Architect determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation on until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect . The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification. ■* Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to .. changes in work. Suborade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill , or topsoil materials. Structure: Buildings , foundations, slabs, tanks , curbs , or other *" man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. no SUBMITTALS Test Reports : Submit the following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copy to Contractor: Test reports on borrow material . Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material , in accordance with specified requirements. Field reports; in-place soil density tests. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. QUALITY ASSURANCE �+ Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance , the .. geotechnical testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect ' s satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699 , that it has the experience and capability to conduct required field and laboratory geo-technical testing without delaying the progress of the Work. 4" EARTHWORK 02200 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK !" PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Preparing of sub rade for slabs , walks, and pavements. Drainage fill course for support of concrete is included as part of this work. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. . Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting , is specified in Division 2 Section, "Landscape Work. " DEFINITIONS Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect . Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor' s expense. Under footings , foundation bases , or retaining walls, fill so unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations 40 of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect . Additional Excavation: When excavation who will makecandinspection subgrade elevations, notify Architect , EARTHWORK 02200 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect If unanticipated mechanical , electrical , or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner' s Representative in written, accurate detail . Pending receipt of directive from Owner' s Representative , rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. SALVAGED MATERIALS 0 Salvaged Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - Deliver to Owner, " carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. Historic artifacts, including cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets , antiques, and other articles of historic significance, remain property of Owner. Notify Owner' s Representative if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal and salvage for Owner. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS .� Remove from building site debris , rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally so dispose off site. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, notify Architect immediately. Comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal , handling , and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site . CLEANUP AND REPAIR General : Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools , equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 `—� 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect ow support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. Cease operations and notify Owner' s Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from �. soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. no Locate identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. ` DEMOLITION General : Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using ' power-driven masonry saw or hand tools ; do not use power-driven impact tools . Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls , floors, or framing. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. Demolish foundation walls to a depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface. Demolish and remove below-grade wood or metal construction. Break up below-grade concrete slabs . For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible. Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from 4W demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel , or sand, free of trash and debris , stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots , or other organic matter. so SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building . Remove protections at completion of work. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. Traffic : Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities . 40 Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets , walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission t�*! from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. Flame Cutting : Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Utility Services : Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or use facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities , as acceptable to governing authorities. 00 Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling , temporary enclosures , and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. on PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) on PART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION General : Provide interior and exterior shoring , bracing , or SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 3 ON, 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect JOB CONDITIONS "" Occupancy: Owner' s tenant will occupy the taxi building next door to the building to be renovated. Conduct selective demolition work so in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner' s normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner' s or tenant ' s normal fto operations. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for No actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, "` minor variations within structure may occur by Owner' s removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. Am Partial Demolition and Removal : Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as Oft work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be '" permitted. Protections : Provide temporary barricades and other forms of so protection to protect Owner' s personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner' s personnel and general public to occupied portions of building. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide shoring, bracing , or support to prevent movement , settlement , or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. .� Construct temporary insulated dustproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or .R dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. Provide temporary weather protection during demolition and removal of existing construction ronlexterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the following: Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as w required to accommodate new construction. Removal of interior partitions as indicated on drawings. Removal of doors and frames not included in new work. Removal of existing windows indicated for replacement or inf ill . Removal work specified elsewhere: Roofing and roof insulation removal is specified in Division 7 . Cutting nonstructural concrete floors and masonry walls for piping , ducts, and conduits is included with the work of the respective mechanical and electrical specification sections in Divisions 15 and 16 . Cutting holes in roof deck for installation of new rooftop mechanical equipment is specified in Division 15 . Related work specified elsewhere: Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications , including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction. Relocation of pipes , conduits, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 1 .w w 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect '0 Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders , thickness as WM necessary to accommodate contents , and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. ■m Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. ..+ When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual . xW PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable ) . PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable) . .r END OF SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 4 ow 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. SUBMITTALS Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect' s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties . Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution. Prepare a written document , ready for execution by the Contractor, or the Contractor and subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer . Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. Form of Submittal : At Final Completion compile two copies of each 00 required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual . WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 3 on oft An 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect go Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that .e has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. Replacement Cost : Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service , life. Owner' s Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, aw obligations , rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties , obligations , rights , go or remedies. Refection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject „o warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents . The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 2 „ 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification erg Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents , including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. e Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor' s special warranty of workmanship and materials. General closeout requirements are included in Section "Project Closeout. " Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 . Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer' s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products , nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. ow DEFINITIONS WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains , films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances . Clean plumbing "A fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps . Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of ON rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits . Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, No to a smooth even-textured surface. Pest Control : Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final "" inspection, and rid the Project of rodents , insects and other pests. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials . Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner' s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of .w associated Work have become the Owner' s property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. END OF SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION +Jr CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner' s personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer' s representatives. Include a !" detailed review of the following items: Maintenance manuals. r Record documents. Spare parts and materials. Tools. Lubricants . Fuels. Identification systems. Control sequences. Hazards. Cleaning . Warranties and bonds. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments . As part of instruction for operating equipment , demonstrate the following procedures: Start-up. Shutdown. Emergency operations. Noise and vibration adjustments. Safety procedures. 00 Economy and efficiency adjustments . Effective energy utilization. pa FINAL CLEANING General : General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities" . Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal , commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with �. durable paper cover sheets , and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. Record Specifications : Maintain one complete copy of the Project .� Manual , including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents " to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions , selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. w. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner' s records. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal . Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site , and from the manufacturer' s installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications. Upon completion of mark-up, submit a bound, complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the Owner' s records. Miscellaneous Record Submittals : Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference . Submit to the Architect for the Owner' s records . Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders , with Pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: Emergency instructions. Spare parts list. Copies of warranties . .� Wiring diagrams. Recommended "turn around" cycles. Inspection procedures . Shop Drawings and Product Data. Fixture lamping schedule. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. Submit final meter readings for utilities , a measured record of stored fuel , and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Submit consent of surety to final payment. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. Submit evidence of final , continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect . Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect' s " reference during normal working hours. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black ► line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure 40 and record at a later date. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil ; use other colors to distinguish between variations, in separate categories of the Work. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable . PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .ft Submit record drawings , maintenance manuals, final project photographs , damage or settlement survey, property survey, and w� similar final record information. Deliver tools , spare parts , extra stock, and similar items. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner' s personnel of change-over in +!�* security provisions. Complete start-up testing of systems , and instruction of the Owner' s operating and maintenance personnel . Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements . Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. +w The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. The Architect will provide a maximum of three inspections: one initial punch list review, and two follow-up visits to verify that the work has been performed satisfactorily. Additional visits required will be at the Contractor' s expense, at the Architect ' s prevailing hourly rates. FINAL ACCEPTANCE Preliminary Procedures : Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following . List exceptions in the request . Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting •• documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. Submit an updated final statement , accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. Submit a certified copy of the Architect ' s final inspection list .� of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. as SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements so for project closeout, including but not limited to : Inspection procedures. Project record document submittal . Operating and maintenance manual submittal . Submittal of warranties. Final cleaning . Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions-2 through -16 . SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Preliminary Procedures : Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following . List exceptions in the request. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows , the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 r percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete . Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete . Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. Submit specific warranties , workmanship bonds , maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. Manufacturer' s recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer' s certification of „r performance. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations_: Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect' s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements. .� Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase " . . . as selected from manufacturer' s standard colors , patterns, textures. . . " or a similar phrase , select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements . The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place , accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 5 mill ws 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRODUCT SELECTION General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents , that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, , safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations , not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: Proprietary Specification Requirements : Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more +. products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name , accompanied by the term "or equal , " or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product . Non-Proprietary Specifications : When the Specifications list .� products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements . Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product . Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. Performance Specification Requirements : Where Specifications .� require compliance with performance requirements , provide MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 4 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each OW item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces . The nameplate shall contain the following „0 information and other essential operating data: Name of product and manufacturer. Model and serial number. Capacity. Speed. Ratings. PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss , including theft. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces . Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily OW damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses . Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer' s original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling , storing , unpacking, protecting and installing . Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction.- ;W Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure , with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer' s instructions. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .. not citizens of nor living within the United States and its possessions . so "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations : To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding . Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance , strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources that produce products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible. Above paragraph is applicable only due to circumstances beyond .. the Contractor' s control . Failure to provide submittals of required products in a timely manner does not provide justification for substitution of materials. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or .more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. Foreign Product Limitations : Except under one or more of the following conditions, provide domestic products , not foreign .� products , for inclusion in the Work: No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents . Domestic products that comply with Contract Document are only +• available at prices or terms that are substantially higher than foreign products that also comply with the Contract Documents . Nameplates : Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer' s or producer' s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL go RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor' s selection of products for use in the Project. The Contractor' s Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Section "Submittals. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for ! + applicability of industry standards to products specified. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions on made after award of the Contract are included under Section "Product Substitutions. " DEFINITIONS Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the a meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents , such as specialties , " "systems , "structure , " "finishes, " " It " " accessories , and similar terms . Such terms such are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material , " "equipment , " "system, " and terms of similar intent . "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer' s product name , including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer' s published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. "Foreign Products" , as distinguished from "domestic products, " are items substantially manufactured ( 50 percent or more of value ) outside of the United States and its possessions ; or produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent ) by persons who are MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 1 to North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by substantial hours of use. END OF SECTION 01500 WM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 10 Ob 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise . Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. ,O OPERATION TERMINATION AND REMOVAL Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities . Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. we Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal . Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar s, elements. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures , heating , cooling , humidity control , ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. Protection: Prevent water filled piping from freezing . Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. Termination and Removal : Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, '! or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. go Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. Remove temporary paving that is not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving . Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that does not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials which might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving , curbs and sidewalks, as required by the governing authority. Ow At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period, including but not limited to: Ox Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. or. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 9 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, " and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations. " Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell . Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations . Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire .� hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires . Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas. Provide supervision of welding operations , combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project , complete installation of the permanent fire •o protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Note: above paragraph does not apply to use of Owner' s fire extinguishers. Contractor to provide his/her own extinguishers for use during construction. Barricades. Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and A. code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against . Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. ,r. Enclosure Fence : When excavation begins , install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates . Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations . Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, " theft and similar violations of security. Storage : Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are �•• of value or attractive for theft , provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. ,.. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 8 • 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material . Toilets: Use of the Owner' s toilet facilities will be permitted, so long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to the Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to new and sanitary condition. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections , comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division-2 Sections . Where feasible , utilize the same facilities . Maintain the site, excavations and construction free of water. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosure for protection r of construction in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and similar activities. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 square feet or less with plywood or similar materials. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing wood-framed construction. Collection and Disposal of Waste : Collect waste from construction + areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris . Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F ( 27 deg C ) . Handle hazardous , dangerous , or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner. SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION go Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available , do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or s longer as requested by the Architect . Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are No supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect AN Connect sewer to the municipal system as directed by the sewer department officials. so Maintain sewer in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION Locate field office and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion .. will be permitted to use permanent facilities , under conditions acceptable to the Owner. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities , for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. Heating Facilities : Except where use of the permanent system is authorized, provide vented self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control . Use of gasoline-burning space heaters , open flame, or salamander type heating units is prohibited. Once permanent heating system is installed, use of system is permitted. Thorough cleaning is required prior to Substantial Completion. Field Office : Provide office of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel -at the Project site . Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings . Furnish and equip offices as follows: Furnish with a desk and chairs , a 4-drawer file cabinet , plan table and plan rack and bookcase . Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type , number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve .� the Project ' s needs. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 6 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are go not chargeable to the Owner or Architect, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size , capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters , transformers, overload protected disconnects , automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution switch gear. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric No power service underground. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise oft vertically where least exposed to damage . Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, AC 20 ampere rating , and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where on overhead and exposed for surveillance. Temporary Lighting : Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching . Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements , without operating the ,�.. entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions . Temporary Telephones : Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities , throughout the construction period. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first aid station. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. A temporary fax machine is recommended, but not required. Sewers and Drainage: Existing sewer line may be used. If sewer can not be lawfully used for discharge of effluent , provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner. Filter out excessive amounts of soil , construction debris , chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge . TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Lamps and Light Fixtures : Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard .. cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage . Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been � tested and labeled by UL, FM or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. Temporary Offices : One room of the building may be used for a temporary office. Temporary Toilets : One existing bathroom may be used for a temporary toilet . wu First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces . In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class ABC dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. ■* PART 3 -- EXECUTION am INSTALLATION am Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. .w Relocate and modify facilities as required. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. WX Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 4W TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION General : Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company' s recommendations . Arrange with the company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services. wa TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 4 pe 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS General : Provide new materials ; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division-6 Section "Rough Carpentry. " For fences and vision barriers, provide exterior type, minimum 3/8" thick plywood. For safety barriers , sidewalk bridges and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8" thick exterior plywood. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof , fire-resistant , UL labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities . Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11-gage, galvanized 2-inch, chain link fabric fencing 6-feet high with galvanized barbed wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I .D. for line posts and 2-1/2" I .D. for corner posts. EQUIPMENT General : Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Architect , undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. Water Hoses : Provide 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant , flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long , with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge . Electrical Outlets : Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters , reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. Electrical Power Cords : Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic . Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress . TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the Work. �* QUALITY ASSURANCE No Regulations : Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations if authorities having jurisdiction, including but •o not limited to: Building Code requirements . Health and safety regulations. 4W Utility company regulations. Police , Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules . Environmental protection regulations. •� Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241 , "Building Construction and Demolition Operations" , ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety ... Requirements for Construction and Demolition" , and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities. " Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services" , prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and .. regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70 ) . Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PROJECT CONDITIONS Temporary Utilities : Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the .. earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service. Conditions of Use : Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities , or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not .� allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 2 „� no 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect A SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES "" PART 1 -- GENERAL ,a RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities , including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. a�• Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to: Water service and distribution. Temporary electric power and light. ± ! Telephone service. Storm and sanitary sewer. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to: Temporary heat. Sanitary facilities , including drinking water. Dewatering facilities and drains. Temporary enclosures. Waste disposal services. Rodent and pest control . Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities . "M Security and protection facilities required include but are no limited to: Temporary fire protection. Barricades, warning signs, lights. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site . Environmental protection. SUBMITTALS Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests , inspections , meter readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. Implementation and Termination Schedule : Submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. ARCHITECT ' S ACTION .A Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal , mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor' s responsibility. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a .� uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and .. Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes , special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required" . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) . PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) . END OF SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 01300 8 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect .■ Compliance with recognized standards . Availability and delivery time. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture , for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3 ) , that show approximate limits of the variations. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections , operation and similar construction characteristics. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal , indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals . Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect' s mark indicating selection and other action. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details , workmanship, fabrication techniques , connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets; one will be returned �w marked with the action taken. Maintain sets of Samples , as returned, at the Project site , for 4* quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal . go Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. on Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators , suppliers , installers , and others as required for performance of the Work. Show go distribution on transmittal forms . Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes , coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. SUBMITTALS 01300 7 Im 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect wiring diagrams and performance curves . Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable ' for use , submit as "Shop Drawings. " Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where NM printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: Manufacturer' s printed recommendations . Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. Application of testing agency labels and seals . Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement . Notation of coordination requirements . „ Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. Submittals : Submit 3 copies of each required submittal ; submit 4 copies where required for maintenance manuals . The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal . Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers , subcontractors , suppliers, manufacturers , fabricators , and .� others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer' s possession. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. SAMPLES Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials , color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect ' s Sample. Include the following: Generic description of the Sample . ., Sample source. Product name or name of manufacturer. SUBMITTALS 01300 6 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. Accidents and unusual events. Meetings and significant decisions . Stoppages , delays, shortages, losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of governing authorities. Change Orders received, implemented. Services connected, disconnected. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. Partial Completions, occupancies. Substantial Completions authorized. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is ' not considered Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns , templates and similar drawings. Include the following information: Dimensions. Identification of products and materials included. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement . Sheet Size : Except for templates, patterns and similar full- ,, size Drawings , submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 24" x 36" . Initial Submittal : Submit 2 blue- or black-line prints for the Architect' s review; one will be returned. Final Submittal : Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints; submit 5 prints where required for maintenance manuals. 2 prints will be retained; the remainder will be returned. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. PRODUCT DATA Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer' s installation instructions, catalog cuts , standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates , standard SUBMITTALS 01300 5 .s 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect in the same locations . Delete parties from distribution when no they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities . Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or A activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE After development and acceptance of the Contractor' s construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for establishment of the Contractor' s construction schedule. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor' s construction schedule. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: Scheduled date for the first submittal . Related Section number. Submittal category. Name of subcontractor. Description of the part of the Work covered. Scheduled date for resubmittal Scheduled date the Architect ' s final release or approval . Distribution: Following response to initial submittal , print and .. distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors , and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. " When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations . Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. Schedule Updating : Revise the schedule after each meeting. or �. activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS Prepare a daily construction report , recording the following .. information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals : List of subcontractors at the site. Approximate count of personnel at the site . SUBMITTALS 01300 4 .. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from 00 sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. On the transmittal record relevant information and requests for 40 data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations . Include Contractor' s certification that 40 information complies with Contract Document requirements . CONTRACTOR' S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE on Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar- chart type Contractor' s construction schedule. Submit within ten days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work" . Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values" . Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets , of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence . Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. Coordinate the Contractor' s construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts , submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect' s procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Work Stakes: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including testing and installation. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal , print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates . Post copies WA in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. When revisions are made , distribute to the same parties and post an SUBMITTALS 01300 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect am Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing , delivery, other submittals and related activities that require .A sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a .. submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal . Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal . No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the R. title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor' s review and approval markings and the action taken. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. Project name. Date . Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. +*■ Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Submittal Transmittal : Package each submittal appropriately for .� transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor SUBMITTALS 01300 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect SECTION 01300 -. SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Vie• Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification we. Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; Contractor' s construction schedule. Submittal schedule . Shop Drawings. Product Data. Samples . Om Administrative Submittals : Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include , but are not limited to: am Permits . Applications for payment. Performance and payment bonds . an Insurance certificates . List of Subcontractors. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Applications for Payment. " SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. SUBMITTALS 01300 1 4W 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Housekeeping. Quality and Work standards. Change Orders. Documentation of information for payment requests. Reporting : No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date, distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should have been present. Include a brief *� summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) am PART 3 --EXECUTION (Not Applicable) no END OF SECTION 01200 .. 40 MW PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 4 Edy Ambroz , Architect 16 North Maple Street Renovations Conduct Project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes , such as regular progress meetings and special pre-installation meetings. WA Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction on activities involved. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting . PROGRESS MEETINGS Conduct progress meetings at the Project site at regularly scheduled intervals. Notify the Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. Attendees : In addition to representatives of the Owner and Architect, each subcontractor, supplier or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning , coordination or Aa performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to progress. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to we the current status of the Project. Contractor' s Construction Schedule : Review progress since the OR last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor' s Construction Schedule , whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so . Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. Review the present and future needs of each entity present , including such items as: Interface requirements. Time . Sequences. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication problems. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and services. Hours of Work. Hazards and risks. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Safety procedures. First aid. ■. Security. Housekeeping. Working hours. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES Conduct a Pre-installation conference at the site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates . Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at �. each pre-installation conference, including requirements for: Contract Documents. No Options . Related Change Orders. Purchases Deliveries. Shop Drawings, Product Data and quality control Samples . Possible conflicts. Compatibility problems. Time schedules . Weather limitations. Manufacturer' s recommendations. . , Compatibility of materials . Acceptability of substrates . Temporary facilities. Space and access limitations . Governing regulations . Safety. Inspection and testing requirements. Required performance results. Recording requirements . Protection. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, along with the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, Promptly, including the Owner and Architect. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully "" concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. am COORDINATION MEETINGS Am PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 2 MR 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect go SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS M PART 1 - GENERAL 0+ RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including but not limited to: Pre-Construction Conference. Pre-Installation Conferences. Coordination Meetings. Progress Meetings. Construction schedules are specified in another Division-1 Section. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Schedule a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting at the Project site or other convenient location no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments . Attendees: The Owner, Architect and their consultants , the Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors , manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as: Tentative construction schedule. Critical Work sequencing . Designation of responsible personnel . Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of Contract Documents. Submittal of Shop Drawings , Product Data and Samples. Preparation of record documents. Use of the premises . Office, Work and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200 1 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc. 111 E. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 ( 312 ) 644-6610 �r► SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association P.O. Box 70 Merrifield, VA 22116 ( 703 ) 790-9890 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau „ 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504 ( 904 ) 434-2611 SSPMA Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Assoc . P.O. Box 298 Winnetka, IL 60093 ( 312 ) 835-8911 TCA Tile Council of America P.O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08542 ( 609 ) 921-7050 TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Assoc. 29 Bank Street Stamford, CT 06901 ( 203 ) 324-7533 UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingsten Rd. Northbrook, IL 60062 ( 708 ) 272-8800 WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc . Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Avenue Portland, OR 97204-2122 ( 503 ) 224-3930 SUBMITTALS Permits. Licenses . and Certificates: For the Owner' s records , submit copies of permits , licenses, certifications , inspection reports, releases , jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable ) END OF SECTION 01095 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 9 so 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Falls Church, VA 22046 ( 703 ) 237-7580 m. NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority 1055 W. Hastings St. , Suite 260 Vancouver, British Columbia ~` Canada V6E 2E9 ( 604 ) 687-2171 NPA National Particleboard Assoc. • 18928 Premiere Court Gaithersburg, MD 20879 ( 301 ) 670-0604 NPCA National Paint and Coatings Assoc . 1500 Rhode Island Ave. , NW Washington, DC 20005 ( 202 ) 462-6272 .,w NRCA National Roofing Contractors Assoc. One O'Hare Centre 6250 River Road, Suite 8030 + Rosemont, IL 60018 ( 708 ) 318-6722 NSF National Sanitation Foundation w. 3475 Plymouth Rd. P.O. Box 1468 Ann Arbor, MI 48106 ( 313 ) 769-8010 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Assoc. (Now NWWDA) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Assoc . ( Formerly NWMA) 1400 E. Touhy Ave. , #G54 .� Des Plaines, IL 60018 ( 312 ) 299-5200 PCA Portland Cement Assoc, 5420 Old Orchard Road *� Skokie, IL 60077 ( 312 ) 966-6200 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute c/o Sol Baker 1106 W. 77th St. , South Dr. Indianapolis, IN 46260 ( 317 ) 251-6970 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B Rockville, MD 20805 ( 301 ) 340-8580 S. D. I . Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road .. Cleveland, OH , 44145 ( 216 ) 889-0010 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council c/o ETL Testing Laboratories Route 11 , Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 ( 607 ) 753-6711 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 8 40 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect #M HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Assoc. 2831 Airways Blvd. , Suite 205, Bldg. B Memphis, TN 38132 ( 901 ) 346-2222 40 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 E. 47th St. � New York, NY 10017 ( 212 ) 705-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 345 E. 47th St. New York, 'NY 10017 ( 212 ) 705-7926 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council c/o ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. P.O. Box 2042 Route 11 , Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 ( 607 ) 753-6711 MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America 1385 Piccard Dr. +! Rockville, MD 20832 ( 301 ) 869-5800 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S. Federal St. , Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 ( 312 ) 922-6222 NBHA National Builders Hardware Assoc. (Now DHI ) ON NEC National Electric Code ( from NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Assoc . 7315 Wisconsin Ave . Bethesda, MD 20814 ( 301 ) 657-3110 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc. 2101 L St. , NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 ( 202 ) 457-8400 + s NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc . One Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 go Quincy, MA 02269-9101 ( 617 ) 770-3000 N. F. P.A. National Forest Products Assoc. 1250 Connecticut Ave . , NW, Suite 200 Washington, DC 20036 ( 202 ) 463-2700 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Assoc. P.O. BOX 34518 Memphis, TN 38184 ( 901 ) 377-1818 NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Assoc. P.O. Box 6830 go REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 7 ON 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Miami , FL 33135 ( 305 ) 443-9353 so AWWA American Water Works Assoc . 6666 W. Quincy Ave. Denver, CO 80235 ( 303 ) 794-7711 BANC Brick Association of North Carolina P.O. Box 13290 Greensboro, NC 27415-3290 ( 919 )273-5566 BHMA Builders ' Hardware Manufacturers Assoc . 355 Lexington Ave. , 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 ( 212 ) 661-4261 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive , Suite 300 Reston, VA 22091 ( 703 ) 620-0010 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Assoc . Hanna Building, Suite 772 1422 Euclid Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115 ( 216 ) 241-0711 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 ( 615 ) 892-0137 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute P.O. Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30722 ( 404 ) 278-3176 CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America . 700 N. Virgil Ave. Los Angeles , CA 90029 ( 213 ) 660-1911 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Rd. McLean, VA 22102 ( 703 ) 556-3990 FM Factory Mutual Research Organization 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 ( 617 ) 762-4300 GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street, NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 ( 202 ) 289-5440 HI Hydronics Institute P.O. Box 218 , 35 Russo Place Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922 ( 201 ) 464-8200 H. I . Hydraulic Institute +*� 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 ( 216 ) 899-0010 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 6 ew 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect !! 30 W. University Drive Arlington Heights , IL 60004 ( 312 ) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 ( 212 ) 354-3300 APA American Plywood Assoc . P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 ( 206 ) 565-6600 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc . 6288 Montrose Rd. Rockville, MD 20852 ( 301 ) 231-9050 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council 1627 K Street, NW, Suite 1000 Washington, DC 20006 ( 202 ) 452-1500 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 ( 404 ) 636-8400 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th St. New York, NY 10017 ( 212) 705-7722 e ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd. , Suite 210 Westlake, CA 91362 ( 805 ) 495-7120 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering P.O. Box 40362 Bay Village, OH 44140 ( 216) 835-3040 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA 19103 ( 215 ) 299-5400 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 S. Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 ( 703 ) 671-9100 AWPA American Wood Preservers' Assoc . P.O. Box 849 Stevensville, MD 21666 ( 301 ) 643-4163 AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau P.O. Box 5283 Springfield, VA 22150 ( 703 ) 339-6660 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, NW P.O. Box 351040 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are .w subject to change and are believed to be , but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association 900 19th St. , NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 ( 202 ) 862-5100 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K St . , NW, Suite 503 Washington, DC 20005 ( 202 ) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Assoc . 2700 River Rd. , Suite 118 Des Plaines, ' IL 60018 ( 312 ) 699-7310 AAN American Association of Nurserymen 1250 Eye St . , NW, Suite 500 Washington, DC 20005 ( 202 ) 789-2900 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit , MI 48219 ( 313 ) 532-2600 AHA American Hardboard Assoc. 520 N. Hicks Rd. Palatine, IL 60067 ( 312 ) 934-8800 AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 20 N. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 ( 312 ) 984-5800 , AI Asphalt Institute Research Park Drive P.O. Box 14052 Lexington, KY 40512-4052 ( 606 ) 288-4960 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Ave. , NW Washington, DC 20006 ( 202 ) 626-7300 A. I .A. American Insurance Assoc. 1130 Connecticut Ave. , NW Washington, DC 20036 ( 202 ) 828-7100 AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Assoc . 345 White Pond Dr. P.O. Box 8390 Akron, OH 44320 ( 216 ) 762-7294 ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee P.O. Box 210 " Germantown, MD 20874 ( 301 ) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Assoc. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 4 .. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect Contractor, or by others when so noted. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever a colon ( : ) is used within a sentence or phrase. INDUSTRY STANDARDS Applicability of Standards : Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Publication Dates: Comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. Conflicting Requirements : Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels . Refer requirements that are different , but apparently equal , and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or on performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements , indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, so as appropriate for the context of the requirements . Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. ON Copies of Standards : Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity' s construction activity. Copies of so applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents , they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations , " published by Gale Research Co. , available in most libraries. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are s rasureferencedrin1Contdract Documents ,following acronyms or abbreviations , REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 3 0. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect contractor of lower tier for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. „ The term "experienced, " when used with the term "Installer, " means having a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Trades : Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to .. imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter. " It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. Protect Site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. Testing Laboratories : A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests . SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute ' s 16-Division format and MASTERFORMAT numbering system. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms , words , and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is the abbreviated type. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated shall be interpolated as the sense required. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and the context of the Contract Documents so indicates . Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications . Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text, for clarity, subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 2 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS General : Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions on of the Contract. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations , notes or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents . Where terms such as "shown, " "noted, " "scheduled, " and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. Directed: Terms such as "directed, " "requested, " "authorized, "selected, " "approved, " "required, " and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect , " "requested by the Architect , " and similar phrases. Approve: The term "approved, " where used in conjunction with the Architect' s action on the Contractor' s submittals, applications , and requests, is limited to the Architect' s duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws , ordinances , statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules , conventions , and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. Furnish: The term furnish" is used to mean f1supply and deliver to the Project site , ready for unloading , unpacking , assembly, installation, and similar operations. " Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the actual "unloading, unpacking , assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying , working to dimension, " finishing , curing , protecting , cleaning , and similar operations. " Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install , on complete and ready for the intended use . Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095 1 on so 16 North Maple Street Edy Ambroz , Architect CLEANING No Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint , mortar, mo oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ,o END OF SECTION 01045 .. we .. W so oft CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 4 no ON 16 North Maple Street Edy Ambroz , Architect 40 the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 04 Cutting : Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer' s recommendations. ON In general , where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding , not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or diamond core drill . Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division-2 where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit , before cutting, where services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. so Where feasible , inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. Ow Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing . Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and. repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and +M appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance . No Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 3 so 16 North Maple Street Edy Ambroz, Architect PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS 4W Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing am adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect . Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding , if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. PREPARATION Temporary Support : Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and ... patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations . A. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas . Ow Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. PERFORMANCE General : Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching . Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other M' components or performance of other construction activities and CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 2 m 16 North Maple Street Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL ,.. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. !•" SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching . Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. Demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations is included in Section "Selective Demolition. QUALITY ASSURANCE Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio . Operational and Safety Limitations : Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in ON increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. Visual Requirements : Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect' s opinion, reduce the building' s aesthetic qualities , or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. Engage a recognized experienced and specialized firm to perform the following work: Stonework. Masonry. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 1 in oil 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without .� damaging effects. Limiting Exposures : Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is .. subject to harmful , dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: Excessive static or dynamic loading. Excessive internal or external pressures. Excessively high or low temperatures. Thermal shock. Excessively high or low humidity. Air contamination or pollution. Water or ice. Solvents. Chemicals . Light . Radiation. Puncture. Abrasion. Heavy traffic . Soiling , staining and corrosion. Bacteria. •• Rodent and insect infestation. Combustion. Electrical current. High speed operation, Improper lubrication, Unusual wear or other misuse. Contact between incompatible materials. .. Destructive testing. Misalignment . Excessive weathering. w Unprotected storage. Improper shipping or handling. Theft. Vandalism. END OF SECTION 01040 *�^ ,r. PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 4 '` 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect No Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) . PART 3 - EXECUTION w GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major ON component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. Manufacturer' s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer' s installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or on stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents . Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items . Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level . Allow for on expansion and building movement . Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results . Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. ON CLEANING AND PROTECTION on During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in ON PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Include such items as required notices, reports , and attendance at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: Preparation of schedules. Installation and removal of temporary facilities . .�., Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Project Close-out activities. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the w Work. Refer to other ** sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner' s property. SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum .. utilization of space for efficient installation of different components . Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. Indicate required installation sequences . , Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals. " Refer to Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements , " .A and Division-16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" for specific coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. w„ Staff Names : Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor' s principal staff assignments, including the ow Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities ; list their addresses and telephone numbers . am PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 2 ,. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and go Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements P" necessary for Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to: Coordination. Administrative and supervisory personnel . General installation provisions . Cleaning and protection. Progress meetings , coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences are included in Section "Project Meetings" . Requirements for the Contractor' s Construction Schedule are included in Section "Submittals" . COORDINATION Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results . Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance , service and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for " later installation. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party m involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES Alternate No. 1 : Prepare and paint taxi building to north of building to be renovated. Paint all wood, railings, and generally, previously painted surfaces on the exterior of the building. Interior work is not included. END OF SECTION 01030 r OR am ■r .w on 9W .w ALTERNATES 01030 2 "" 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 4 SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents . Coordination: � Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project . Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate . Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of 00 this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices , accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) . ALTERNATES 01030 1 PART II:AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS MNIRACr 24 FLOOD INSURANCE If the project is located in an area that has been identified by the Federal Emergency Management Agency as an area having special flood hazards and if the sale of flood insurance has been made available under the National Flood Insurance Program, the Owner agrees that the project will be covered, during its anticipated economic or useful life,by flood insurance in " an amount at least equal to its development or project cost (less estimated land cost) or to the mardmum limit of coverage made available with respect to the particular type of property under the National Flood Insurance Act of 1968,whichever is less. w MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11190) Page 14 of 14 PART II.•AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT 4. Subcontracts +* The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs B.1 through B.4 of this section, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs B.1 through B.4 of this section. G Wage Claims and Adjustments The contractor shall be responsible for the correction of all violations under this section, including violations committed by subcontractors. If there is evidence of underpayment of salaries or wages to any laborers or mechanics (including apprentices and trainees) by the contractor or any subcontractor or a failure by the contractor or any subcontractor to submit payrolls and related reports, the contractor shall be required to place an amount in escrow, as determined by HUD, sufficient to pay persons employed on the work covered by the Agreement the difference between the salaries or wages actually paid such employees for the total number of hours worked and the full amount of wages required under this Agreement, as well as an amount determined by HUD to be sufficient to satisfy any liability of the contractor or subcontractor for liquidated damages pursuant to this section. The amounts withheld may be disbursed by HUD for and on account of the contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due, and to the Federal Government in satisfaction of liquidated damages under this section. D: Evidence of Unit Completion, Escrow 1. The Owner must evidence the completion of the Contract Units by furnishing the PHA, in addition to the requirements listed in Part I of this Agreement, a certification of compliance with the provisions of this section 23, and that to the best of the Owner's knowledge and belief there are no claims of underpayment to laborers or mechanics in alleged violation of these provisions. If there are any such pending claims to the knowledge of the Owner, the PHA, or HUD, the Owner must place a sufficient amount in escrow, as directed by the PHA or HUD, to assure such payments. 2. The escrows required under this section shall be paid to HUD, as escrowee, or to an escrowee designated by HUD, and the conditions and manner of releasing such escrows shall be designated and approved by HUD. aw MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (1L90) Page 13 of 14 PART IL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT 'Whoever, for the purpose of. . . influencing in any way the action of such Administration . . . makes, utters or publishes any statement, •.� knowing the same to be false . . . shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both.' ,.R B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act As used in this paragraph B, the terms 'laborers' and 'mechanics' include watchmen and guards. L Overtime Requirements No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of eizht hours in any calendar day or in excess of LqM hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times_ the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of eight hours in any « calendar day or in excess of forty hours in such workweek, whichever is greater. 2 Violation: Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages �. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph B.1 of this section, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be �• liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards,employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph B.1 of this section, in the sum of S10 for each calendar day on which such .. individual was required or permitted to.work in excess of eight hours or in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by such clause. 3. Withholding for r Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages ow HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/90) Page 12 of 14 PART A:AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT 6. Subcontracts The contractor or subcontractor must insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 55(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR Part 55. 7. Contract Termination: Debarment A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 55 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12 & Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are incorporated by reference in this contract 9. Disputes Concerning Labor Standards Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6,and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 10. Certification of Elier-bility a. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in ,a HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. b. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD program pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. C. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.0 1001. Additionally, U.S. Criminal Code, Section 1010,Title 18 U.S.C., 'Federal Housing Administration ,sw transactions% provides in part: MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11190) Page 11 of 14 w�a PART It-AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT b. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is , not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utt7ize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved C. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this section shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. S. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract .. MODERATE REHABILPITAT1ON 52538 B (11)90) Page 10 of 14 PART IL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT determinati on for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less +* than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid m accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau,withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. w on MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (1]190) Page 9 of 14 PART IL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT (c) Each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract (3) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the 'Statement of Compliance' required by paragraph A3.b(2) of this section. (4) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject MW the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code. G The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph A3.a of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription. by authorized representatives of HUD or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the �^ contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required retards upon request or to make such ow records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR Part 5.12. 4, Apprentices and Trainees ORO a. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to , and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program,who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by .w the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker fisted on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate,who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, w. shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/'90) Page 8 of 14 PART EL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section im 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Numbers 1215- 0140 and 1215-0017.) ow b. (1) 'The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which contract wor is performed a copy of all payrolls to the PHA, for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the *+ information required to be maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be submitted in any form desired. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0149.) ROe (2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a 'Statement of Compliance.' signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following. (a) The payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(x)(3)(1) and such information is correct and complete. w (b) Each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly. No deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned,other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3. MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/'90) Page 7 of 14 .w PART IL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT c, Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. d. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing ..A bona fide hinge benefits under a plan or program. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215- 0140.) 2 Withholdine HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee or helper, employed or working on the site of the work under the United States Housing Act of 1937 in the ,.. construction of the project, all or part of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, w. advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. �* 3. Payrolls and Basic Records wo a. Payrolls and basic records relatinE thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working_at the site of the work under the United States Housing Act of 1937 in the w ON construction of the project Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of , contributions ar costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section l(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/90) Page 6 of 14 PART IL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT (a) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (b) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry, and (c) The proposed wage rate, including any bona-fide fringe SO benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (2) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed po in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative,will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or al will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1215- 0140.) (3) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the " . recommendation of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative,will issue a determination within 30 days of sir receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.) (4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) aw determined pursuant to paragraphs b(2) or b(3)shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11190) Page 5 of 14 PART IL AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT A. L Minimum Wages A. (1) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work under the United States Housing Act of 1937 in the construction of the project will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once at weeks thout subsequent deduction r rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regu ations sued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Pan 3), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination o e Secretary of rabor which is attached hereto and made a pan hereof; regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide .. fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs,which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. (2) Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed,without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Pan 5S(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR Pan 5S(a)(1)(it) and the Davis- Bacon poster (WH-1321)) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a Prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. „w„ b. (1) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformity with the wage determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when the following criteria have been met: MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/90) Page 4 of 14 .. P PART TL•AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT any subcontract unless the subcontractor has first provided the contractor with a preliminary statement of ability to comply with the requirements of these regulations. "E Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder prior to the execution of the contract shall be a condition of the financial assistance provided to the project, binding upon contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns. Failure to fulfill these requirements shall subject the contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns to those sanctions specified by the contract, and to such sanctions as are specified by 24 CFR, Section 135.135' 4W E The Owner agrees to be bound by the above Section 3 clause with respect to the Owner's own employment practices when participating in federally assisted work. ' 2.2 CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT In compliance with regulations issued by the Environmental Protection Agency ('EPA), 40 CFR, Part 15, pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended ('Air Act),42 U.S.C. 7401, et seq., the Federal Water Pollution Control Act,as amended ("Water Act), 33 U.S.C. 1251, et seq., and Executive Order 11738, the Owner agrees to: A Not utilize any facility in the performance of this Agreement or any subcontract which is listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities pursuant to Part 15 of the regulations for the duration of time that the facility remains on the List; B. Promptly notify the PHA if a facility the Owner intends to use in the performance of this Agreement is on the EPA List of Violating Facilities or the Owner knows that it has been recommended to be placed on the List: G Comply with all requirements of the Air Act and the Water Act, including the requirements of Section 114 of the Air Act and Section 308 of the Water Act, and all applicable clean air standards and clean water standards; and D. Include or cause to be included the provisions of this section in every subcontract and take such action as HUD may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 23 FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS The Owner is responsible for inserting the entire text of paragraphs A and B of this section in all construction contracts. If the Owner performs any construction work on the project, the Owner must comply with all provisions of paragraphs A and B. MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/90) Page 3 of 14 ..m PART M AGREEMENT TO ENTER HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT C. Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders issued by HUD thereunder prior to execution of this Agreement, shall be a condition of the Federal financial assistance provided to the project, binding upon the Owner, the Owner's contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns. Failure to fulfill these requirements shall subject the Owner, the Owner's contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns to the sanctions specified by this NOW Agreement, and to such sanctions as are specified by 24 CFR, Section 135.135. D. The Owner shall incorporate or cause to be incorporated into any contract or subcontract for work pursuant to this Agreement in excess of$50,000 cost, the following clause: 'EMPLOYMENT OF PROJECT AREA RESIDENTS AND CONTRACTORS 'A The work to be performed under this contract is on a project assisted under a program providing direct Federal financial assistance from HUD and is subject *� to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3 requires that, to the greatest extent feasible, opportunities for training and employment be given lower MO, income persons residing within the unit of local government or the metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county), as determined by the Secretary, in which the project is located and contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or owned in substantial part *" by persons residing in, the same metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the project 'B. The parties to this contract will comply with the provisions of Section 3 and the regulations issued by HUD as set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder prior to the execution of the contract The parties to this contract certify and agree that they are under no contractual or other disability which would prevent them from complying with these requirements. 'C'. The contractor will send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers' representative of the commitments under this Section 3 clause and shall .w post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment or training. OD. The contractor will include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract for work in ON connection with the project and will, at the direction of the applicant for or recipient of Federal financial assistance, take appropriate action pursuant to the IN subcontract upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of regulations .. issued by HUD, 24 CFR,Part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the contractor has notice or knowledge that the latter has been found in violation of regulations under 24 CFR, Part 135, and will not let "s MODERATE REHABU TT'ATION 52538 B (11M) No Page 2 of 14 11111 AGREEMENTICONTRACT NUMBER. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT SECTION 8 HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS PROGRAM SECTION 8 MODERATE REHAB=ATION PROGRAM PART u AGREEMENT TO ENTER INTO HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT NOTE. Part I of the Agreement specifies which provisions of Part II are applicable. 2.1 TRAINING EMPLOYMENT AND CONTRACTING OPPORTUNITIES FOR BUSINESSES AND LOWER INCOME PERSONS A. The project assisted under this Agreement is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3 requires that, to the greatest extent feasible, WWMQities for trainin and employment be ' n lower-income rsons residin within the unit of local overnment or a metropolitan area or nonmetropolitan country), az determined by the Secretary, in which a project is located and contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in, the same metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the project- B. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Owner shall carry out the provisions of Section 3 and the regulations issued by HUD as set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder prior to the execution of this Agreement. The requirements of the regulations include, but are not limited to, development and implementation of an affirmative action plan for utilising business concerns located within, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in, the area of the project; the making of a good faith effort, as defined by the regulations, to provide training, employment, and business opportunities required by Section 3; and incorporation of the 'Section 3 clause' specified by Section 135.20(b) of the regulations and paragraph D of this section in all contracts for work in connection with the project The Owner certifies and agrees that the Owner is under no contractual or other ? disability which would prevent compliance with these requirements. ,1 MODERATE REHABILITATION 52538 B (11/90) Page 1 of 14 PART M HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT any subcontract unless the subcontractor has first provided the contractor with a preliminary statement of ability to comply with the requirements of these regulations. 'E. Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CM Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder prior to the execution of the contract shall be a condition of the financial assistance provided to the project, binding upon contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns. Failure to fulfill these requirements shall subject the contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns to those sanctions specified by the contract,and to such sanctions as are specified by 24 CFR, Section 135.135.0 E The Owner agrees to be bound by the above Section 3 clause with respect to the Owner's own employment practices when participating in federally assisted work 2.2 CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT In compliance with regulations issued by the Environmental Protection Agency ('EPA', 40 CFR, Part 15, pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended ("Air Act'), 42 U.S.0 7401,et seq., the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended ('Water Act'), 33 U.S.C. 1251, et seq., and Executive Order 11738, the Owner agrees to: A. Not utilize any facility in the performance of this Agreement or any subcontract which is listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities pursuant to Part 15 of the regulations for the duration of time that the he ity remains on the List; B. Promptly notify the PHA if a facility the Owner intends to use in the performance of this Agreement is on the EPA List of Violating Facilities or the Owner knows that it has been recommended to be placed on the List: C Comply with all requirements of the Air Act and the Water Act, including the requirements of Section 114 of the Air Act and Section 308 of the Water Act, and all applicable clean air standards and clean water standards; and D. Include or cause to be included the provisions of this section in every subcontract and take such action as HUD may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 23 FLOOD INSURANCE If the project is located in an area that has been identified by the Federal Emergency Management Agency as an area having special flood hazards and if the sale of flood insurance has been made available under the National Flood Insurance Program, the Owner agrees that the project will be covered, during its anticipated economic or useful life, by flood insurance in an amount at least equal to its development or project cost (less estimated land cost) or to the «.. maximum limit of coverage made available with respect to the particular type of property under the National Flood Insurance Act of 1968,whichever is less. aw MODERATE REHABILTTATION 52539 B (11/90) Page 3 of 3 PART II: HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT !` G Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders issued by HUD thereunder prior to execution of this Agreement, shall be a condition of the Federal financial assistance provided to the project,binding upon the Owner, the Owner's contractors and subcontractors, successors, and assigns. Failure to fulfill these requirements shall subject the Owner, the Owner's contractors and subcontractors,successors, and assigns to the sanctions specified by this Agreement, and to such sanctions as are specified by 24 CFR, Section 135.135. D. The Owner shall incorporate or cause to be incorporated into any contract or subcontract for work pursuant to this Agreement in excess of S50,000 cost, the following clause: uEhIPLOYMENT OF PROJECT AREA RESIDENTS AND CONTRACTORS 'A The work to be performed under this contract is on a,p Q e assisted under a rogram providing direct Federal financial assistance from HU�and is subject to the r utrements of Section 3 off`the offing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3 requires that, to the greatest extent feasible,Dnoortunities for !B4&& and employment be eimn lower income persons residing within the unit of local government or the metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county), as determined by the Secretary,in which the project is located and contracts for work in connection with the project be �waa3ded to business concerns which are located in, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in, the same metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the project B. The parties to this contract will comply with the provisions of Section 3 and the regulations issued by HUD as set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder prior to the execution of the contract The parties to this contract certify and agree that they are under no contractual or other disability which would prevent them from complying with these requirements. 'C. The contractor will send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding,if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers' representative-of the commitments under this Section 3 clause and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment or training. 8D. The contractor will include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract for work in connection with the project and will, at the direction of the applicant for or recipient of Federal financial assistance, take appropriate action pursuant to the subcontract upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of regulations issued by HUD, 24 CFR, Part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the contractor has notice or knowledge that the latter has been found in violation of regulations under 24 CFR, Part 135,and will not let MODERATE REHABILITATION 52539 B (11/90) Page 2 of 3 s Y AI! Mme! AGREEMENT/CONTRACT NUMBER: U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT SECTION 8 HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS PROGRAM SECTION 8 MODERATE REHABILITATION PROGRAM ow PART II ow HOUSING ASSISTANCE PAYMENTS CONTRACT NOTE: Part I of the Contract specifies which provisions of Part II are applicable. ` 21 TRAINING, EMPLOYMENT AND CONTRACTING OPPORTUNITIES FOR , BUSINESSES AND LOWER INCOME PERSONS A. The project assisted under this Agreement is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of .. the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3 requires that, to the greatest extent feasible, opportunities for training and employment be given lower-income persons residing within the unit of local government or the metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan country), as determined by the Secretary, in which the project is located and contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in, the same metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the r� project. B. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Owner shall carry out the provisions of Section 3 and the regulations issued by HUD as set forth in 24 CFR, Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder prior to the execution of this Agreement. The requirements of the regulations include, but are not limited to, development and implementation of an affirmative action plan for utilizing business concerns located within, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in, the area of the project, the making of a good faith effort, as defined by the regulations, to provide training, employment, and business opportunities required by Section 3; and incorporation of the 'Section 3 clause'specified by Section 135.20(b) of the regulations and paragraph D of this section in all contracts for work in connection with the project. The Owner certifies and agrees that the Owner is under no contractual or other disability which would prevent compliance with these requirements. ., MODERATE REHABILITATION 52539 B (11/90) Page 1 of 3 MA91-3 462b (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I am MA91-3 CLASS VI - Specialized Earth Moving Equipment over 35 Tons. Im cuss II - Trailers for Earth Moving Equipment (Double Hookup) . .4. 462a (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I MA91-3 Electric Pumps used in Well point system, Tireman, Pumps -- 16 inches or over total discharge, Compressors (1 or 2) 900 cu. ft. and over, Powered Grease Truck, Tunnel Locomotives and Dinkeys, Grout pumps, Hydraulic Jacks (jacking pipe, slip forms, etc. ) , Boom Truck, self- 11 propelled Hydraulic Cranes--up to 10 ton, Combination Back Hoe-Loader- -up to 3/4 yard hoe. CLASS IIIA - Asphalt Rollers, Self-Powered Rollers and Compactors, Tractor without blade drawing sheeps foot roller, Rubber tire roller, Vibratory roller, or other type of compactors including machines for pulverizing and aerating soil. CLASS IV - Hoists, Conveyors, Power Pavement Breaker, Self-propelled Material Spreader, Self-powered Concrete Finishing Machine, Two Bag +� Mixer with skip, MCarthy and similar Drills, Batch Plant (not self- loading) , Bulk Cement Plant 3 or more lOKW Light Plants, 30 KW or more Generators. �r CLASS V - Compressor (315 cu. ft. to 900 cu. dt. , 1 or 2) , Pumps-4" to 16" total discharge. CLASS VI - Compressor (up to 315 cu. ft. ) , Small Mixers with skip, oiler Pumps up to 411, Grease Truck, Helper on powered Grease Trucks, Power Heaters, Welding Machines (when 3 or more welding machines are „ used, Classification 4 rat shall be paid) , A-Frame Trucks, Forklifts-- up to 7 ft. lift and up to 3 ton capacity, Hydro Boom, Power Safety Boat. CLASS VII - Truck Crane Crews. CLASS VIII - Oiler. CLASS IX - Master Mechanic. CLASS X - Boom lengths over 184 feet (including jib) . CLASS XI - Boom lengths over 225 feet (including jib) . TRUCK DRIVERS: CLASS I - Station Wagons, Panel Trucks and Pickup Trucks. CLASS II - Two axle Equipment; Helpers on Low Bed When Assigned at the Discretion of the Employer, Warehousemen, Forklift Operators. CLASS III Three Axle Equipment and Tiremen. CLASS IV - Four and Five Axle Equipment. CLASS V - Specialized Earth Moving Equipment under 35 tons other than Conventional type trucks, Low Bed, Vachual, Mechanics, Paving Restoration Equipment, Mechanic. 462 (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I NM .w MA91-3 Pavement Finishing Machines, Two Bag Mixers with Skip, McCarthy and similar drills, Batch Plants (not self-loading) , Bulk Cement Plants, Self-propelled material spreaders, A-Frame Trucks, Fork Lifts--up to 15 ft. , 3 or more lOKW Light Plants, 30 KW or more Generators. CLASS V - Compressors (one or two) 315 cu. ft. to 900 cu. ft. , Pumps-- 4 inches to 12 inches (total discharge) . CLASS VI - Compressors (up to 315 cu. ft. ) , small mixers, pumps (up to 4 inches) , power heaters, welding mahines, (when 3 or more heaters or welding machines are used on one job, classification 4 rate will be paid) , Conveyors, Oiler, helpers on grease trucks with hand greasing equipment. CLASS VII - Truck Crane Crews. �* CLASS VIII - Oiler. CLASS IX - Master Mechanic. CLASS X - Boom lengths over 184 feet (including jib) . CLASS XI - Boom lengths over 225 feet (including jib) . POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (HEAVY & HIGHWAY) : CLASS I - Shovels, Crawler and Truck Cranes, Derricks, Backhoes, Trenching Machines, Elevating Graders, Belt-type Loaders, Gradalls, Pile Drivers, Conceete Pavers, on site Processing Plant (Engineer in charge) ,Dragline,Clam Shell, Cableways, Shaft Hoists, Mucking Machines, Front End Loader--5 1/2 yards and over Tower Cranes, Self- propelled Hydraulic Cranes--10 tons and over, Dual Pavers, Automatic Grader--Excavator (C.M.I. or equal) , Scrapers towing pan or wagon, Tandem Dozers or Push Cats (2 units in tandem) , Welder using semi- automatic Welding Machine, Shotcrete Machine, Tunnel Boring Machine, Combination Back Hoe-Loader--3/4 yard hoe or over, Jet Engine Dryer, Tree Shredder, Post Hole Digger, Post Hole Hammer, Post Extractor, Truck Mounted Concrete Pumps with boom, Roto-Mill. CLASS II - Rotary Drill (with mounted Compressor) , Compressor House (3 to 6 Compressors) , Rock and Earth Boring Machines (excluding McCarthy and similar drills) , Grader, Front End Loaders-- 4 yards to 5 1/2 yards, Scraper--21 yards and over (struck load) , Forklifts--7 ft. lift and over or 3 ton capacity and over, Sonic Hammer Concole, Road Planner, Cal Tracks, Ballast Regulators, Rail Anchor Machines, Switch Tampers. , CLASS III - Bulldozer, Push Cats, Scrapers--up to 21 yards (struck load) self-propelled or Tractor Drawn, Self-powered Asphalt Paver, Front End Loaders -- up to 4 yards, Mechanics, Welders, Well Driller, Pumperete Machine, Engineer or Fireman on High Pressure Boiler (on job) , Self-loading Batch Plant(on job 0, Well Point Operators, 461 (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I MA91-3 CLASS or Asphalt Tender, Pipelayer, PneumaticaDrill e operator, Pneumatic operator, Mason Tool Operator, Wagon Drill Operator. CLASS III - Air Track Operator, Block Pavers, Rammers, Curb Setters. CLASS IV - Blasterers, Powdermen. CLASS V - Flaggers. POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (BUILDING CONSTRUCTION) : CLASS I - Shovels, Cranes (including all tower, climbing and bridge cranes, used in Building Construction as defined in Scope of- Employment) , Hydraulic Cranes--10 ton capacity or over, Draglines, e Derricks, Elevators with Chicago Boom, Backhoes, Gradalls, Elevating Graders, Pile Driving Rigs, Concrete Road Pavers, all three Drum Hoisting and Trenching Machines, Belt-type Loaders, Foreman Mechanics, Front End Loaders--5 1/2 yards or over, Dual Drum Paver, Automatic Grader (i.e. C.M. I. ) , Combination Backhoe-Loader--3/4 yard or over, postE Extractor eTruck eMounted dConcrete Pump with hboom, Roto1Mill. Po Compressor House (3 CLASS II - Rotary Drill (with mounted compressor) , P to 6 compressors) , rock and earth boring machines (excluding McCarthy and similar drills) , Graders, Front End Loaders-4 yards to 5 1/2 yards, two Drum Hoists, High Fork Lifts with capacity of 15 ft. and over, Scraper--21 yards and over (struck load) , Sonic Hammer Console, Road Planer, Cal Tracks, Ballast Regulators, Rail Anchor Machines, Switch Tampers. CLASS III - Combination Backhoe-Loader--up to 3/4 yard hoe, Bulldozers, Push Cats, Scrapers--up to 21 yards (struck load) selfpropelled or tractor drawn, Tireman, Front End Loaders--upr o 4 yards, Asphalt Paver, Well Drillers, Mechanics, Welders, Pump Machines, Concrete pumps, and similar type pumps, Engineer or Fireman on High Pressure Boiler (on job) , Self-Loading Batch Plant, Well Point Operators (including installing) , Electric pumps used in Wessoro(one System, Pumps--12 inches and over (total discharge) , P Sy ft. and over, Engineers in charge of Powered Grease or two 900 Cu- Truck, all automatic elevators (permanent or temporary) operated manually or remote control (not to be confused with elevators s Boom operating from conventional hoist--1, 2 or 3 Drum) , Grout pumps, ,■, Truck, Hydraulic Cranes--under 10 ton. CLASS IIIA - Asphalt Rollers, Self-powered Rollers and Compactors, Tractor without blade drawing sheepsfoot roller, rubber tire roller, vibratory roller, or other type of compactors including machines for pulverizing and aerating soil. CLASS IV - Single Drum Hoist, Power Pavement Breakers, Concrete 460 (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I MW MA91-3 *LABORERS (Building & Residential) Area 1: Hamden; Hampshire; FRANKLIN (Except Twps. of Warrick and Orabge; Berkshire (Remainder of County) Area 2: Berkshire (Pittsfield Only) LABORERS (Heavy & Highway) : Area 1: Hampden; Hampshire; FRANKLIN (Except Twps. of Warrick and Orange) ; Berkshire. .� Area 2: FRANKLIN (Orange, Warrick) . PILEDRIVERMEN: See Carpenters. PLUMBERS & STEAMFITTERS: Area 1: FRANKLIN (Orange) . Area 2 : BERKSHIRE (Except Otis, Becket, Sandisfield) ; FRANKLIN (Monroe, Towe, and Western part of Charlemont) . Area 3 : HAMPDEN; HAMPSHIRE; BERKSHIRE (Otis, Becket, Sandisfield; FRANKLIN (Remainder of County) . CLASSIFICATIONS LABORERS (BUILDING CONSTRUCTION) : GROUP 1 - Laborers, carpenter tenders and wrecking laborers. GROUP 2 - Asphalt Rakers, Carbide Core Driller Operators, Chain Saw Operators, Pipelayers, Jackhammer and Paving Breaker Operators, Barco- type Jumping tampers, Laser Beam Operators, Concrete Pump Operators, Mason-Tenders, Mortar Mixers, Ride-on Motorized Buggy Operators and .« Wagon Drill Operators. GROUP 3 - Pre-cast Floor and Roof Plank Erectors and Asbestos Removers GROUP 4 - Air Track Operators, Block Pavers, Rammers and Curb Setters. GROUP 5 - Powdermen and Blasters. LABORERS (HEAVY & HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION) : CLASS I - Carpenter Tenders, Cement Finisher Tenders, Laborers, Wrecking Laborers. 459 (Oct. 18 , 1991) VOL. I , MA91-3 AREA DESCRIPTIONS BRICKLAYERS; CEMENT MASONS ; PLASTERERS ; STONEMASONS; MARBLE; TILE & TERRAZZO WORKERS; PAINTERS; CLEANERS & CAULKERS: Area 1: HAMPDEN: HAMPSHIRE; FRANKLIN; BERKSHIRE (Becket, Otis, Standisfield) . Area 2: BERKSHIRE (Adams, North Adams, Cheshire, Florida, Savoy, Clarksbury, Williamstown) . Area 3: BERKSHIRE (Remainder of County) . CARPENTERS; SOFT FLOOR LAYERS; DRYWALL CARPENTERS: Area 1: BERKSHIRE; FRANKLIN (Monroe, Monroe Bridge) . Area 2: FRANKLIN (Erving, Warwick, Orange, North Orange) . Area 3 FRANKLIN (Remainder of- county) *Area 4 : HAMPDEN; HAMSHIRE DIVERS ' TENDERS: See Carpenters. ELECTRICIANS Area 1: BERKSHIRE; FRANKLIN (Hawley, Monroe, Rowe) ; HAMPSHIRE: (Middlefield, Cummington, Plainfield) . Area 2: FRANKLIN (Remainder of County) ; HAMPSHIRE (Remainder of County) ; HAMPDEN (Chester, Holyoke and North Portion of Chicopee - "' North of McKinstry Avenue from the Connecticut River to Grattan Street, Lafayette Street to York Street, McKinstry to Granby Road, and projected to the Westover Air Force Base fence, continuing northeastly along this boundary to the county line) . Area 3: HAMPDEN (Remainder of County - including Westover Air Force Base) ; HAMPSHIRE (Belchertown, Ware) . IRONWORKERS: Area 1: HAMPSHIRE; HAMPDEN; FRANKLIN; BERKSHIRE (Becket, Washington, Lee, Sandisfield, New Marlboro, Hinsdale, Peru, Savoy, Monterey, Sheffield, Windsor, Otis, N. & E. Otis) . Area 2: BERKSHIRE (Remainder of County) . 458 (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I on MA91-3 *ROOFERS: Composition, Damp Waterproof 16.89 7.08 Slate, Tile, Precast Concrete 17.36 7.08 *SHEET METAL WORKERS 19.36 9.20 .� SPRINKLER FITTERS 22.80 7.23 *TRUCK DRIVERS: Class I 17.88 4.78+ f+g Class II 18.05 4.78+ f+g Class III 18.12 4 .78+ f+g Class IV 18.24 4 .78+ f+g Class V 18.34 4.78+ f+g Class VI 18.63 4.78+ f+g Class VII 18.92 4.78+ f+g Welders - Rate for craft which the welding is incidental. .. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (ii) ) . FOOTNOTES: Paid Holidays: A-New Year's Day; B-Memorial Day; C-Independence Day; D-Labor Day; E-Thanksgiving Day; F-Christmas Day a. Employer contributes 8% of basic hourly rate for 5 years or more of service 6% basic hourly rate for 6 months to 5 years of service w„ as vacation pay credit. b. 6 paid holidays: A through F providing employee has worked 5 consecutive days before and the working day after the holiday. C. 2 paid holidays: C & D, provided the employee has been employed seven days prior to the holiday by the same employer. d. 8 paid holidays: A through F, Washington's Birthday and Veterans Day. e. 9 paid holidays: A through F, Washington's Birthday, Columbus Day and Veterans Day. f. 10 paid holidays: A through F, Washington's Birthday, Patriot's Day, Columbus Day, and Veterans Day. g. Paid Vacation: 4 months to 1 year - 1/2 day's pay per month; 1-5 years - 1 week; 5-10 years - 2 weeks; 10 years or more - 3 weeks. Employee must have received pay for 120 days during last year of employment. h. Paid Holidays: a through f, Washington's Birthday; Columbus Day and Veterans Day 457 (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I „�, MA91--3 PAINTERS: Berkshire County: Brush and tapers 17 .36 4 .74 Spray and sandblasting 20.33 4 .74 Swing stage and steel riding under 17.55 4 .74 40 ft. Swing stage and steel riding over 17.86 4.74 40 ft. Sign painters 15.44 4 .00 Remainder of Counties: Brush and tapers 17.86 4.74 Spray and sandblasting 20.33 4.74 Swing stage and steel riding under 18.05 4.74 40 ft. Swing stage and steel riding over 18.36 4 .74 40 ft. PILEDRIVERMEN: Area 1 17 .115 5.90 Area 2 18.20 5.90 Area 3 17 .935 5.90 Area 4 17 .66 5.90 PLUMBERS & STEAMFITTERS: Area 1 19.23 4 .10 Area 2 20.70 7 .36 Area 3 20.46 7 .20+ c POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS BUILDING CONSTRUCTION & RESIDENTIAL: - Class I 19.73 4 .80+d Class II 19.47 4.80+d Class III 19.27 4 .80+d Class IIIA 18.81 4.80+d Class IV 16.71 4.80+d Class V 15.82 4.80+d Class VI 14.27 4 .80+d Class VII 20.55 4 .80+d Class VIII 15.50 4 .80+d Class IX 20.55 4.80+d 20.46 4,80+d Class X 21.09 4.80+d Class XI POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS HEAVY & HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION: !� Class I 19.73 4.80+d Class II 19.4.7 4.80+d Class III 19.27 4.80+d Class IIIA 18.81 4.80+d 16.71 4.80+d Class IV Class V 15.82 4.80+d Class VI 14.27 4 .80+d Class VII 20.55 4.80+d Class VIII 15.50 4.80+d Class IX 20.55 4.80+d Class X 20.46 4.80+d Class XI 456 (Oct. 18, 1991) 21.09 4.80+d VOL. I MA91-3 Sheeters 17.95 7.04 Sheeters, bucker-up 17.825 7. 04 Commercial projects valued at $600,000 or less and/or industrial projects valued at $100,000 or less (excluding complete razing of structures) except pre- engineered metal buildings and excepting erection and installation of structural �* steel 13 .27 7.04 Rehabilitation work on residential structures (including structures over 4 .� stories) , defined to include all work, including demolition, alteration and repair on any existing structure which is intended for predominantly residential use 13.27 7.04 *LABORERS (BUILDING) & RESIDENTIAL: *AREA 1 Group 1 _ 14 .80 6.00 ,. Group 2 15.05 6.00 Group 3 15.55 6. 00 Group 4 15.55 6. 00 Group 5 15.80 6. 00 *AREA 2 Group 1 14.70 5. 65 Group 2 14 .95 5. 65 .. Group 3 15.45 5. 65 Group 4 15.45 5. 65 Group 5 15.70 5. 65 *LABORERS (HEAVY & HIGHWAY) : *Area 1 Class I 14.80 6. 00+ h Class II 15.05 6. 00+ h Class III 15.55 6. 00+ h Class IV 15.80 6. 00+ h Class V 11.90 5.20+ h *Area 2: Class I 16.65 6.20+ h Class II 16.90 6.20+ h Class III 17.40 6.20+ h Class IV 17.65 6.20+ h Class V 11.20 5.20+ h *LINE CONSTRUCTION: (Includes traffic control illumination and maintenance, and railroad construction) Lineman, cable splicer dynamite man 21.50 6.89+6.25% Heavy equipment operator 19.35 6.89+6.25% Equipment operator, tractor trailer driver, field mechanic 18.28 6.89+6.25% Driver groundman 16.13 6.89+6.25% ,. Groundman 11.83 6.89+6.25% Flagman 9. 68 6.89+6.25% MARBLE, TILE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS 14.95 MILLWRIGHTS 21.10 8. 18 455 (Oct. 18 , 1991) VOL. I MA91-3 Basic Fringe Hourly Benefits Rates *INSULATION/ASBESTOS WORKERS 19. 68 8.33 *HAZARDOUS MATERIAL HANDLER: (Includes preparation, wetting, stripping, removal scrapping, vacuuming, bagging and disposing of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems. ) w Berkshire, Hampden & Hampshire Cos. 15.50 4.70 BOILERMAKERS 20.08 2.70+ 10$ *BRICKLAYERS; CEMENT MASONS; PLASTERERS; w STONE MASONS; MARBLE, TILE & TERRAZZO WORKERS; POINTERS; CLEANERS; CAULKERS: Area 1 19. 25 5.82 Area 2 23 . 50 Area 3 18.22 5.31 CARPENTERS ; SOFT FLOOR LAYERS; DRYWALL CARPENTERS; LATHERS: Area 1 17 .83 5. 10 Area 2 18 .93 7.33 Area 3 17.45 5.47 All work under $2 million (except power plant work) 14 .79 6. 57 All other work 17 . 40 6. 57 Area 4 18 . 15 6. 57 w DIVERS 25. 06 5.90 DIVERS' TENDERS: Area 1 17. 115 5.90 Area 2 18 .20 5.90 Area 3 17 . 935 5.90 Area 4 17. 66 5.90 ELECTRICIANS: Area 1 19 .40 5.10+ 3% Area 2: Electrical contracts 150,000 and over 19.05 5.08+ 3% Electrical contracts under 150,000 17.05 5.08+ 3% Area 3 20.75 6.20+ 3% ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS: Elevator constructors 22.13 5.67+ a+b Helpers 15.49 5.67+ a+b Probationary helpers 11.065 GLAZIERS 15. 17 4.70 *IRONWORKERS: 18. 66 9.31 Area 1 * Area 2: Structural, ornamental, reinforcing, machinery,movers, riggers, rodmen, fence erectors & stone derrickmen 17.70 7.04 454 (Oct. 18, 1991) VOL. I GENERAL WAGE DESCISION NO. MA91-3 Supersedes General Wage Decision No. MA90-3 State: MASSACHUSETTS County(ies) : BERKSHIRE, FRANKLIN, HAMPDEN, AND HAMPSHIRE Construction Type: Building, Heavy, Highway & Residential Construction Description: Building Projects, Residential Construction Projects (Including Single family homes and garden apartments up to and including 4 stories) , Heavy and Highway Project, and Marine Projects. +. Modification Record: No. Publication Date Page No. (s) 1 Mar. 15, 1991 454-456 2 Apr. 12, 1991 454 3 May 10, 1991 454 ** 4 June 21, 1991 456 5 Aug. 9, 1991 454-455 6 Oct. 4, 1991 454-458 7 Oct. 18, 1991 454-462b .R VOL. 1 453 to 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect N SECTION 01028 - .LABOR GUIDELINES go PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. GENERAL The following pages contain specifications for minimum wage rates required for this project, and the Owner' s Housing Assistance Payments Contract. The Contractor is obligated to observe requirements of this section. END OF SECTION 01028 e• 4" „ „ LABOR GUIDELINES 01028 1 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. Proof that taxes , fees and similar obligations have been paid. Removal of temporary facilities and services. Removal of surplus materials , rubbish and similar elements. Change of door locks to Owner' s access. u PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable ) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable ) END OF SECTION 01027 �w APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 5 o 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Work covered by the application who could lawfully be an entitled to a lien. Waiver Forms : Submit waivers of lien on forms , and executed in "' a manner, acceptable to Owner. Initial Application for Payment : Administrative actions and No submittals that must precede submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: List of subcontractors. o List of principal suppliers and fabricators. Schedule of Values. Contractor' s Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final ) . ► Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final ) . List of Contractor' s staff assignments. List of Contractor' s principal consultants. Copies of building permits . Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work. Initial progress report. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds ( if required) . Data needed to acquire Owner' s insurance. .. Initial settlement survey and damage report , if required. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: Occupancy permits and similar approvals. am Warranties (guarantees ) and maintenance agreements. Test/adjust/balance records. Maintenance instructions. Meter readings ; . so Start-up performance reports . Change-over information related to Owner' s occupancy, use , operation and maintenance. Final cleaning. Application for reduction of retainage , and consent of surety. Advice on shifting insurance coverages . Final progress photographs. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect ' s Certificate of Substantial Completion. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following : Payment Completion of Project closeout requirements. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. �* APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 4 '"" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Payment Application Times : Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement . The period of construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. Payment Application Forms : Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the form for Application for Payment. Application Preparation: One week prior to Payment Application date, provide to the architect a pencil copy of the entire *" requisition for review. The architect will notify the contractor of any revisions one day prior to the Payment Application date. Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete , or mathematically incorrect applications will be returned without action. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor' s Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if g+ revisions have been made . Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. Transmittal : Submit 5 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours ; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments , when required. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments , and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect . Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors or sub- !" subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers . The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities 00 involved in the Work must submit waivers . Waiver Delays : Submit each Application for Payment with the 40 Contractor' s waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 3 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate an columns to indicate the following for each- item listed: Generic name. ow Related Specification Section. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. '" Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value. Dollar value. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to •• facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports . Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or equipment , purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items on .� the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment . Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. .� At the Contractor' s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of an Values or distributed as general overhead expense . Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values ** when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT: Each Application for Payment shall - be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. The initial Application for Payment , the Application for Payment .� at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements . APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 2 «,� MR 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect s SECTION 01027....- APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT on PART 1 - GENERAL so RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and oft Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor' s Applications for Payment. The Contractor' s Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in Section "Submittals" . SCHEDULE OF VALUES Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor' s Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including : Contractor' s construction schedule . Application for Payment form. List of subcontractors. Schedule of alternates. List of products. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. Schedule of submittals. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 7 days after the Notice to Proceed date. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: Project name and location. Name of the Architect . Project number. Contractor' s name and address. Date of submittal . APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 1 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect PREPARATION Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related construction activities. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Allowance No . 1 : Include a lump sum of $2 , 500 . 00 for the purchase and installation of plants , including lawns . Base bid includes preparation of planting beds, which is not part of this allowance . Refer to "Landscape Work" section for requirements for installation of plantings . Allowance No. 2 : Include a lump sum of $1 , 300 . 00 for the purchase and installation of a stacking, coin-operated washer and dryer. Connections are not part of this allowance: they are included in the base bid. END OF SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES 01020 3 so 4W- 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SUBMITTALS Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each .� allowance. ow ALLOWANCES Use the allowance only as directed for the Owner' s purposes , and only by Change Orders which designate amounts to be charged to the allowance. The Contractor' s related costs for products or equipment ordered .M by the Owner under the allowance, including delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental , and similar costs are not part of the Contract Sum. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include the Contractor' s related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. At Project closeout , credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. ,. UNUSED MATERIALS Im Return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and No accepted. Where it is not economically feasible to return unused material for credit and when requested by the Architect, prepare unused .w material for the Owner' s storage, and deliver to the Owner' s storage space as directed. Otherwise , disposal of excess material is the Contractor' s responsibility. .W PART.-2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .w PART 3 --EXECUTION Mal INSPECTION Inspect products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for .m damage or defects. on ALLOWANCES 01020 2 "�" ON 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 00 SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES ON PART 1 - GENERAL am RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing handling and processing allowances. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases , their installation are shown and specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. Additional requirements, if necessary, will be issued by Change Order. war Types of allowances required include the following : Lump sum allowances. Procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders are include in Section "Change Order Procedures. " Use of allowances for inspection and testing agencies is included in Section "Quality Control Services. " SELECTION AND PURCHASE At the earliest feasible date after Contract award, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed in order to avoid delay in performance of the Work. When requested by the Architect , obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections ; include recommendations that are relevant to performance of the Work. Purchase products and systems as selected by the Architect from the designated supplier. ALLOWANCES 01020 1 am 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A separate contract has been issued for installation of a sprinkler system in the building. This work will be performed during the duration of this Contract, and is scheduled to be completed prior to completion of this Work. General Contractor' s Contract with the Owner hereby includes coordination responsibility. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES General : During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor' s use of the premises is limited only by the Owner' s right to perform construction operations with its own forces or to employ separate contractors on portions of the project. , Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the tenant on site ( taxi company) . Do not use .e these areas for parking or storage of materials. Parking is limited to the public street . Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations . Take all precautions necessary to protect the building during the construction period. OWNER OCCUPANCY Tenant Occupancy: The Owner' s tenant in the taxi company next door will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner' s tenant during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate tenant ' s usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the tenant ' s operations. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. Prior to Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational . Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) . oft PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) . so END OF SECTION 01010 an SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 2 as ON so 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections , apply to this Section. PROJECT DESCRIPTION The Protect consists of an alterations and addition to "The Maples" , at 16 North Maple Street in Florence, Massachusetts, as shown on Contract Documents prepared by Edy Ambroz , Architect , Northampton, MA, dated March 1 , 1992 . The Work consists of the renovation of a 3-story residential rooming house, with additions consisting of a dormer and third floor extension. Interior renovations of the existing building , landscaping, new gas service, and other miscellaneous site improvements are required as part of the Work. The Work includes selective demolition, concrete, masonry repairs, carpentry, insulation, roofing and flashing , joint sealants, new doors and hardware, and miscellaneous windows . I'm Interior finishing and related construction, including interior partitions , gypsum drywall , resilient flooring , carpet , and painting , are included in this work. Specialties include fire extinguishers , toilet and bat accessories, and residential equipment. Mechanical and electrical work includes complete plumbing , piping , fixtures, heating plant and distribution, and electrical service and distribution. TIME OF COMPLETION In accordance with the General Conditions , the Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the Owner/Contractor Agreement , and shall be completed within 120 days. 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect 1 . Until the Work is completed and accepted by the Owner, the Owner .shall purchase and maintain All-Risk Builder' s Risk insurance written on a completed value basis and covering the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof . The Owner shall also seek to purchase Owner' s Protective Coverage and Premises- Operations coverage with any exclusion for X-C-U deleted. ARTICLE 12 : UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK .w Insert the following sentence after the first sentence of subparagraph 12 . 2 . 2 : Final Payment or an Architect' s Certificate for Final Payment shall not be deemed acceptance of such condition. ARTICLE 13 : MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Add new paragraph 13 . 2. 2 as follows: � . 13 . 2 . 2 If , after making Final Payment, the Owner conveys to a third party any building or other improvement constructed under the Contract , any rights with respect to the property so conveyed which the Owner may have against the Contractor under Article 12 , or by virtue of claims which, under the terms of subparagraph 9. 10 .4 , are reserved to the Owner after the making and acceptance of Final Payment, shall automatically transfer to such third party. Any claims the Contractor may have against the Owner may be asserted against such third party. Add subparagraph 13 . 4 . 3 as follows : 13 . 4 . 3 No consent or waiver, express or implied, by the Owner, the am Contractor or the Architect to, or of , any breach of any covenant, condition or duty of the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall be construed to waive any other breach of the same or any other covenant, condition or duty. END OF SECTION 00800 " " Supplement to General Conditions 00800 7 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect 1 ) Each Occurrence $1 , 000 , 000 2 ) Annual Aggregate $1 , 000, 000 b) Property Damage +•■ 1 ) Each Occurrence $250 , 000 2 ) Annual Aggregate $250, 000 combined single limit of $1 , 000 , 000 , including Body Injury and Property Damage. 3 . Personal Injury Annual Aggregate $1 , 000 , 000 ,4 . Complete Operations and Products Liability as well as Contractor' s Liability coverage insuring the indemnity agreement in this Contract shall be maintained for one ( 1 ) year after Final Payment . 5 . Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards : X x C x U x ,,, 6 . Comprehensive Automobile Liability a) Bodily Injury am 1 ) Each Person $500 , 000 2 ) Each Occurrence $500 , 000 M! b) Property Damage ow 1 ) Each Occurrence $250, 000 7 . Renewal Certificates shall be addressed to and filed with both the Contractor and the Owner at least thirty ( 30 ) days prior to the aW expiration date of required policies. 8 . The Contractor may require all Subcontractors to maintain insurance conforming to the provisions of the Paragraph 15 . 1 and the Contractor shall maintain on file all such required Certificates of Insurance , which file shall be available for inspection by the Owner upon request. 9 . In addition to the Comprehensive General Liability coverage required to be carried by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 15 . 1 ( 2 ) of this Contract , the Contractor shall also provide the Owner with Certificate( s ) of Insurance under a Blanket Excess Liability policy. Said policy shall contain limits of coverage for Personal Injury and- Property Damage in amounts not less than $1 , 000 , 000 per each occurrence , $3 , 000 , 000 aggregate . B. Insurance to be purchased by the Owner: Supplement to General Conditions 00800 6 "' 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect and only items which can be corrected or completed without substantial interference with the Owner' s use of the Work remain to be corrected and completed. Compliance with the requirements of subparagraph 13 . 5 . 4 shall be a condition precedent to Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 11 : INSURANCE AND BONDS Change subparagraph 11 . 1 . 2 to read as follows: ON 11 . 1 . 2 The insurance required by subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1 shall include all major divisions of coverage, and shall be on a comprehensive general basis including Premises and Operations ( including X-C-U) , Owner' s and Contractor' s Protective, Products and Completed Operations , and Owned, Non-Owned, and Hired Motor Vehicles . Such insurance shall be written for not less than the limits of. liability required in Article 15 of these Supplementary General Conditions . Add after subparagraph 11 . 3 . 1 the following: 11 . 3 . 1 . 5 Property insurance referred to in subparagraph 11 . 3 . 1 shall be subject to the following limitations : 1 . Excepted from coverage shall be owned, rented or leased construction tools and equipment to be used to perform Work by the Contractor and his subcontractors. 2 . The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall be solely responsible for all loss or damage to construction tools or equipment used to perform the Work. Any insurance protecting such equipment shall include an endorsement waiving the insurer' s right of subrogation against the Owner, Architect, and their consultants. Delete paragraph 11 . 3 . 2 in its entirety. Add after 11 . 5 the following paragraphs : SCHEDULE OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The insurance required by Subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1 with respect to the Contractor shall be written for not less than the following: 1 . Worker' s Compensation a) State Statutory b) Employer' s Liability Statutory 2 . Comprehensive General Liability ( including Premises-Operations; Independent Owner' s and Contractor' s Protective ; Products and Completed Operations Broad Form Property Damage ) a) Body Injury Supplement to General Conditions 00800 5 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Samples shall not constitute approval of any changes not requested *' on prior submittal . ARTICLE 5 : SUBCONTRACTORS .o Add the following subparagraph 5 . 1 . 3 to follow subparagraph 5 . 1 . 2 : 5 . 1 . 3 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner or the Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. „n ARTICLE 8 : TIME o 8 . 2 . 4 The time by which the Work shall be completed is that period stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement . The Contractor agrees that it shall use its best efforts to have the work completed within the time period specified pursuant to the Owner-Contractor Agreement . 8 . 2 . 8 Nothing herein shall limit the Owner' s right to liquidated .� or other damages for delays by the Contractor or to any other remedy which he/she may possess under other provision of the Contract Documents or by law. ARTICLE 9 : PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Add the following Clause 9. 3 . 1 . 3 to 9. 3 . 1 : 9 . 3 . 1 . 3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety �• Percent ( 90%) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Any reductions in retainage shall be as approved by the Owner. Applications for payment shall be made as outlined elsewhere in this Contract. Add the following subparagraph: 9 . 3 . 4 In no event will any materials and/or equipment be deemed .. delivered and suitably stored at the site unless in the judgment of the Architect , the following requirements are met : w 1 . The Contractor has used its best efforts to schedule delivery of materials so that they are ready for prompt use. 2 . The Contractor shall adequately store and safeguard the materials and/or equipment until they are incorporated in the Work. The Contractor shall provide insurance certificates for materials stored off site. 3 . The Contractor shall provide written verification from supplier that materials have been paid for. Add at the end of subparagraph 9. 8 . 1 : Supplement to General Conditions 00800 4 .� F" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect ,,,o Contractor shall not proceed with any Work either improperly shown in the Contract Documents , but shall request additional drawings or instructions from the Architect as provided herein. If the Contractor proceeds with such work without obtaining further !10 drawings or instructions, he shall correct Work incorrectly done at his own expense. P. Delete subparagraph 3 . 3 . 2 in its entirety and substitute the following: 3 . 3 . 2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and all other persons performing or supplying the Work under a contract with the Contractor. 3 . 4 . 1 Add the following sentence to the end of subparagraph 3 . 4 . 1 : The word 'provide' shall mean to furnish and install complete, including connections, unless otherwise specified. .r Add new paragraphs 3 . 5 . 2 and 3 . 5 . 3 as follows: 3 . 5 . 2 The warranty provided in this paragraph 4 . 5 shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law. 3 . 6 Delete paragraph 3 . 6 TAXES in its entirety and substitute the following: 3 .6 . 1 The Owner is exempt from payment of sales taxes. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with the tax exempt identification number at the signing of the Contract. 3 . 7 . 3 Add at the beginning of subparagraph 3 . 7 . 3 the following: Except for any submittals prepared by the Contractor. Add new subparagraph 3 . 9 . 2 as follows: 3 . 9 . 2 The Contractor shall coordinate and supervise the work performed by Subcontractors to the end that the Work is carried out po without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the Work. 3 . 12 . 5 Add the following to the end of subparagraph 3 . 12 . 5 : All shop drawings shall be submitted within ten days of the Notice to Proceed. 3 . 12 . 9 Delete the period and add the following at the end of subparagraph 3 . 12 . 9 : or to deviations in the same from the requirements of the Contract Documents . Unless such written notice has been given, the Architect' s approval of resubmitted Shop Drawings , Product Data, or Supplement to General Conditions 00800 3 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz, Architect indicated by the Contract Documents. 1 . 2 . 7 Where codes, standards, requirements , publications (or official interpretations of the same) of public and private bodies are referred to in the Specifications, references shall be understood to be the latest revisions ( or interpretations) prior to the date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement , except where otherwise indicated. so ARTICLE 2 : OWNER ON 2 . 2 . 2 Delete in its entirety. Delete subparagraph 2 . 2 . 4 in its entirety and substitute the so following : 2 . 2 . 4 Information or services under the Owner' s control shall be "A furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. Delete subparagraph 2 . 2 . 5 in its entirety and substitute the following : 2 . 2 . 5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be furnished free of charge one set of Contract Documents. The Contractor' s cost of reproducing, for use by the #* Subcontractors, all copies of the Contract Documents reasonably necessary for the execution of the work shall be included in the Contract Sum. ARTICLE 3 : CONTRACTOR Delete subparagraph 3 . 2 . 1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 3 . 2 . 1 Before starting the Work, and at frequent intervals during .. the progress thereof, the Contractor shall review and compare the Owner-Contractor Agreement, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings , Specifications, Addenda and other Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Architect in writing any error, inconsistency, omission or variance with any laws, ordinances , rules , regulations, or ascertainable interpretations of the same it may discover. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or the Architect for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents so reported. In the event any error, inconsistency, omission, or variance is found by the Contractor in the Contract Documents , the Contractor shall also give the Architect timely notice in writing of any additional design drawings , specifications, or instructions required to define the Work in greater detail or correct such error, inconsistency, or omission in order to permit the proper progress of the Work. The Supplement to General Conditions 00800 2 00 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect SECTION 00800 ....- SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, delete and/or add to the General Conditions (AIA Document A201 , 1987 Edition) . Where any article, paragraph or sub-paragraph in the General Conditions is supplemented, amended, voided or superseded by any of the following paragraphs , the provisions of such article , paragraph or sub- paragraph not so supplemented, amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 : GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 . 2 . 3 Add the following sentences to the end of paragraph 1 . 2 . 3 : All work mentioned or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be performed by the Contractor as part of this Contract unless it is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents that such work is to be done by others. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall request written clarification from the Architect pursuant to paragraph 4 . 2 . 12 . In the event of inconsistency of the Contract Documents , the greater quality or quantity will prevail . Other inconsistencies shall be presented to the Architect for interpretation. Add the following at the end of subparagraph 1 . 2 . 4 : The "Scope of Work" as outlined in various Sections of the Specifications shall not be deemed to limit the work required. The Contractor and each Subcontractor( s) are responsible for thoroughly examining all Drawings, including all details for each particular type of work, and comparing the same with the Specifications pertaining thereto. The Contractor and Subcontractor( s ) are also responsible for determining the exact scope of the work of each type , relating the exact scope of the work of each type to the scope of their work and to the work of others . Each shall perform all work necessary to produce the indicated results. Add new subparagraphs 1 . 2 . 6 through 1 . 2 . 11 as follows : 1 . 2 . 6 All indications or notations which apply to one of a number of similar situations, materials or processes shall be deemed to apply to all such situations, materials or processes wherever they appear in the Work, except where a contrary result is clearly Supplement to General Conditions 00800 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon appli- Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any tion of the Contract. .0 prior rights of the surety: 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip- FOR CONVENIENCE ment,tools,and construction equipment and machin- 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in ery thereon owned by the Contractor; writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in �w .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. graph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased Owner may deem expedient. cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interrup- .w 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not .1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus- be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for �* finished. which the Contractor is responsible; or 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- another provision of this Contract. tect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. �e w� w w� MW Oft AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 24 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 .w 3187 p The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- ARTICLE 14 paragraph 13.5.3. ON 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the expenses. Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the Shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be following reasons: secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the 1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author- Architect. ity having jurisdiction; 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect 3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for fIl ri arid,promptly �d,where practicable,at the normal place Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the "� g reason for withholding certification as provided in 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable made payment on a Certificate for Payment within delay in the Work. the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions by the 13.6 INTEREST Owner as described in Paragraph 14,3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such any 365-day period, whichever is less; or rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence 5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable where the Project is located. evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor ma}', 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and LIMITATION PERIOD Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment .1 Before Substantial Completion.As to acts or failures and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and to act Occurring prior to the relevant(.late of Substan- damages. 40 tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped fora period of 60 days through shall commence to run and ;Inv alleged cause Of action no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events agents or employees or any other persons performing portions not later than such date of Substantial Completion; of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the 2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations Bate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occur under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor- ting subscyucnt to the relevant date of Substantial rant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor mav, upon Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certiti- seven additional craw' written notice to the Owner and the utI cafe for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner shall commence to run and any alleged cause of as provided in Subparagraph 1=1,1.2. action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE Pw events not later than the(.late of issuance: of the final 14.2.1 The Owner mav terminate the Contract if the Certificate for Payment; and Contractor: .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu- enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; A ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli- 2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials cable statute of limitations shall commence to rum and or labor in accordance with the respective agreernenis any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have between the Contractor and cite Subcontractors; accrued in any and all events nor later than the date of .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances,or rules, reg- anv act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to ula[ions or orders of a public authority having juris any warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the(late diction; or of anv correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2,or the •4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision w date of actual commission of anv other act or failure of the Contract Documents. to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner, upon or Owner, whichever occurs last. certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to jus- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 23 for commencement of warranties established under Sub- ARTICLE 13 paragraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract low Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after 13.1 GOVERNING LAW receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the 13.1.1 The Contract shall he governed by the law of the place Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep- where the Project is located. tance of such condition. This period of one year shall be am extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, No tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect Contract.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Con- covery of the condition. tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract -,is a whole without written consent of the other. If as 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of either party attempts to make such an assignment without such the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the for all obligations under the Contract. Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. so 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been dulv dance with Paragraph 2.4. if the Contractor does not proceed served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of no with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it able time fixed by written notice from the Architect,the Owner was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified ntav remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at mail to the last business address known to the party giving the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs notice. of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof,after deducting 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract DoCLI- mcnts and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- g tractor,including compensation for the Architect's services and addition to,and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contract Sum shall he reduced by the deficiency. If payments Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, Owner. except .is may be specifically agreed in writing. so 12.2.5 The Contractor shall hear the cost of correcting 6estroved or damaged construction, whether completed or 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the a,„ which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- Work required by the Contact Documents or by laws, ordi- tract Documents. nances, rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- Vise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for so strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent test- obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the No obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no :architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- with the Contract DOCUments may be sought to be enforced, dares. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced approvals which do not become requirements until after hids so u•c received or negotiations concluded. to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- g tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- so 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in paragraph 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to snake arrangements the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- for Such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity section, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as acceptable to rile Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely on appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections whether or not final payment has been made. are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OP THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION WN 22 A201-1987 AiA'D •(S-)1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W..WASHINGTON,D.C.211(3O(; ; I 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop- to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection be erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj- The Owner as fiduciary shall,in that case,make settlement with ect during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.3.7 for distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate the arbitrators will direct such distribution. property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this 11,3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 9,9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall panies providing property insurance have consented to such file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, defini- consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, tions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior writ- reduction of insurance. ten notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.3.7 Waivers Of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac- tor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcon- tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- tractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their sub- contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga- property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or tions arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate ARTICLE 12 contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the gation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per- the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity Contract Time, had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 12.1.2 if a portion of the Work has been covered which the 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in air appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover- clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shalt pay ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received charged to the Owner, If such Work is not in accordance with by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for manner. payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner 12,2,1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed 00 fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro- or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor- such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec- dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, tions and compensation for the Architect's services and or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the expenses made necessary thereby. procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam- 12.2.2 if, within one year after the date of Substantial Comple- aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. tion of the Work or designated portion thereof,or after the diite AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OP THE.CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITF.CTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.200o6 A201.1987 21 .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupa- other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property tional sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is employees; earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the or disease,or death of any person other than the Con- Work. tractor's employees; 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage liability coverage which are sustained(1)by a person and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false- employment of such person by the Contractor,or(2) work, temporary buildings and debris removal including by another person; demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom; insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. a person or property damage arising out of owner- 11.3.1.2 if the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of 3.18, the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Con- the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contrac- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is for is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to put- greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason- from date of commencement of the Work until date of final able costs properly attributable thereto. payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after final payment. 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. such deductibles.If the Owner or insurer increases the required do These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given the additional costs not covered because of such increased or 00 to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the required to remain in force after final payment and are reason- Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered ably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation because of deductibles. of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application 11,3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- 00 for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information ments,this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the value established in the approval,and also portions of the Work Contractor's information and belief. in transit. �•t 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11,3,2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Optionally, required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall w. the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self- specifically cover such insured objects during installation and protection against claims which may arise from operations until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor insurance unless specifically required by the Contract shall be named insureds. ■w Documents. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property ro and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to tact Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the fire or other hazards however caused. oft entire Work at(tie site on a replacement cost basis without vol- 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for untary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be main- risks other than those described herein or for other special haz- rained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents ards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof *w are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION go 20 A201-1987 AIAf •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 ARTICLE 10 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,main- 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by twining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- im connection with the performance of the Contract, able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated sites and utilities. 4W biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly on except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in qualified personnel. fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance nated biphenyl(PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the accordance with final determination by the Architect on which Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone Article 4. for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may Ir be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Archi- addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. tect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses, includ- 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of ing but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the from performance of the Work.in the affected area if in fact the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB)and has superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor i!w not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage, in writing to the Owner and Architect, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom,but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by 10.3 EMERGENCIES negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre- the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- h claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of 4.3 and Article 7. indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person NO described in this Subparagraph 10.1.4. ARTICLE 11 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY INSURANCE AND BONDS WA 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as OR be affected thereby; will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally 40 under care, custody or control of the Contractor or liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontrac- Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by tors; and any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as liable: ow trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts cation or replacement in the course of construction. which are applicable to the Work to be performed; AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201.1987 19 nated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work accept- Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contrac- Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, .A for shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's pletion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the observations and inspections,the Work has been completed in Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is for and noted In said final Certificate is due and payable. The substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities, have been fulfilled. damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to ... tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be tion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub- responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner) mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2)a certificate evidenc- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason in reflecting adjustment in retainage,t if any,for such Work or por- tion that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if w.t 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE any, to final payment and(5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- receipts, releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac- in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3.11 and authorized Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien •,,, partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, secu- and reasonable attorneys' fees. rr rity,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insur- ance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- 9,10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final r considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree- and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- ment between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- reached, by decision of the Architect. tract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit- Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and determine and record the condition of the Work. conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.The making of final payment shall 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- paragraph 4.3.5. tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. *�* 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Sub- 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make the waiver described in Subparagraph 4.3.5. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION • 18 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrac- 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are tor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly removed, certification will be made for amounts previously due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the withheld. Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in 9,6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the the Architect. Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the 9,6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- dance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representa- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments with the Contract Documents upon.Substantial Completion,to to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion results of subsequent tests and inspections,to minor deviations of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement "a from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- Pill amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. !!r means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner except as may otherwise be required by law. to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made go examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner for has used money previously paid on account of the Contract similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. Sum. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and Contract Documents. may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after unahle to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, Or if the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con- Certificate for Pavment for the amount for which the Architect tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi- Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION .1 defective Work not remedied; 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ing probable filing of such claims; ciendy complete in accordance with the Contract Documents .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended eriy to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or use. equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work Cannot be com- 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit .5 damage to the Owner or another contactor; to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- pleted within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid plete and correct items on the list.Failure[o include an item on balance would not be adequate to cover actual or such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ! " .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance mens. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will with the Contract Documents. make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AiA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION A10 •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 17 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK ARTICLE 9 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the 9.1 CONTRACT SUM intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,includ- and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out Such written ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the orders promptly. Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor TIME shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- 8.1 DEFINITIONS ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect, of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. Lions for Payment. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each wn by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for whom the Contractor is responsible. an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner 8.1.4 The term"day" as used in the Contract Documents shall or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. ,,,W 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- account of changes in the Work which have been properly tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet e Orders. Im included in Chan for performing the Work. 8 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely com- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other .., date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the reason, Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall nut 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract DOCL1111CIII5, be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incur- given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in potation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, writing not less than five days or other agreed period before payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. mechanic's liens and other Security interests. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's the Contract Time. title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME storage and transportation to the site for such materials and 8.3.1 if the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the c(luipmcnt stored off the site. Work by an act or neglect of die Owner or Architect, or of an 9,3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued authorizeC by the Owner pcnding arbitration, or by other no auid payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in reasonable time as the Architect may determine. favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or ON other persons or entities making a 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with 1 g claim by reason of having applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of dam- 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the aw Contract Documents. Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• r(UURTEENTH EDITION 16 A201-1987 A10 •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.00o6 w ARTICLE 7 .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent- CHANGES IN THE WORK age fee; or ■S .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.1 CHANGES 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the tion of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change for indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,includ- Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. alone. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli- with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- for shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the sect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- minor change in the Work. ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or allowance for overhead and profit. In such case,and also tinder subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise on to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: equitably adjusted. ,1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by OR agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the compensation insurance; Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- stating their agreement upon all of the following: ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or tM .1 a change in the Work; consumed; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of any; and hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if others; any. .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES nel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- 7,3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac- adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or for to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits 04 within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi- covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured tract Time being adjusted accordingly. on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the 7.3.8 if the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based for determination. on one of the following methods: 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the deter- .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized urination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agree- mit evaluation; ment upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective w� .2 tout prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu- sequently agreed upon; tion of an appropriate Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDI'T'IONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2o0o6 A201.1987 15 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- *� the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ments,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum ments,assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcon- deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. as tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so Owner until subsequently revised. that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and i shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, otherwise it the Subcontract agreement, the benefit v all when the Owner performs construction or operations related rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the w. Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi- Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-sub- tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 posed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract and 12. No agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Documents. wM 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: execution or results upon construction or operations by the .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to ** Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Para- proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to graph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon- construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper tractor in writing; and execution and results. Failure of the Contractor SO to report .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. rate contractors'completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, defects not then reasonably discoverable. the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi- ARTICLE 6 ble therefor. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate .� 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, jec[ to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the separate and to award separate contracts in connection with other por- contractor has reciprocal obligations, tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the similar to these including those portions related W insurance same responsibilities for cutting g and patching as are described and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP where in the Contract Documents. uw 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate con- 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost Owner-Contractor Agreement. among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL.CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- FOURTEENTH EDITION 14 A201-1987 AIA` •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall, files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be decided demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra- by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry tion is permitted to be demanded.When a party fails to include Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, rently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently, Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- 4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration.During arbi- having jurisdiction thereof. " tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3.4. ARTICLE 5 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded.Demand for arbi- tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of(1)the SUBCONTRACTORS date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci- 5.1 DEFINITIONS sion on the Claim, (2)the tenth day after the parties have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events at the site.The term"Subcontractor" is referred to throughout described in Subparagraph 4.3.2. the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1) Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- tractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate the decision is final but subject to arbitration and(2)a demand contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a No the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized >o arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may representative of the Sub-subcontractor. be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER concerned. CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac- ticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to 4.5.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made ties(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal poi- based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute fabricated ca the Work.The Architect will promptly reply n the Con- tractor or of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7, in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants,except able objection. Aw by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall sonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contrac- made reasonable objection. for as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor 1a person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or inal third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. However, no me involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change consent to arbitration of a dispute not described therein or with unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in a person or entity not named or described therein. The fore- submitting names as required. going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate on with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli- or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. reasonable objection to such change. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 13 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final reso- substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make scheduled construction. payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner because of an act or omission of the other party,of any of the except those arising from: other party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances aris- such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or ing out of the Contract and unsettled; damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first r� of the Contract Documents; or observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for addi- .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted,it shall Documents. be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. w 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con- 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ditions are encountered at the site which are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a ws unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif- Claim:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant, fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally (2)submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- recognized as inherent in construction activities of the tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of by the observing party shall be given to the other party the Claim by the other party or(5)suggest a compromise.The promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Archi- any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. tect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved,the Architect will prepare or cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the obtain appropriate documentation. Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary the conditions at the site are not materially different from those response, take one or more of the following actions:(1)submit indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify modify the initial Claim or(3)notify the Architect that the initial the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claim stands. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter 1 in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within mination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the 4.4, parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default, emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- the Architect may, but is not obligated to,notify the surety and graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written 4.5 ARBITRATION interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3)a writ- 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, tect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5)termination of the or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the procedure established herein. award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4,4 shall be subject to case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. arbitration upon written demand of either party. Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim «wr 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4.3 for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data and no decision has been rendered. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION �w 12 A201-1987 AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,NW.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20000 ew �r tractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or of any out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, other persons performing portions of the Work. responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administre- representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents rated in the Contract Documents. or when direct communications have been specially autho- 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- ing performance under and requirements of the Contract cate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- wo consultants shall be through the Architect.Commu- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within separate contractors shall be through the Owner. which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur- tIM� 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will nish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. made for them. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- Contract Documents and wilt be in writing or in the form of tion of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed. will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision rendered in good faith, made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic tect to the Contractor,Subcontractors,material and equipment effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons perform- Contract Documents. ing portions of the Work. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpre- limited purpose of checking for conformance with information tation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The ments. The Architect's action will be taken with such reason- term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques- able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or resat- activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals party making the Claim. is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or an error or omission by the Architect,shall be referred initially performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4.A deci- responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4, shall Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's Submit- be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not matters arising prior to the date final payment is due,regardless ! " constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise of(1)whether such matters relate to execution and progress of specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, the Work or(2) the extent to which the Work has been com- methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an Shall not he a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in assembly of which the item is a component. the event(1)the position of Architect is vacant,(2)the Architect has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construe- within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final mechanic's lien. completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be documents required by the Contract and assembled by the made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro- after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CON'rRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° •C 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1 987 11 .1► Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of sect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of [hem the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall arising out of(1)the preparation or approval of maps,drawings, not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- opinions,reports,surveys,Change Orders,designs or specifica- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or 3.15 CLEANING UP failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the ARTICLE 4 Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.1 ARCHITECT 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the 4.1,1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. ..w tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever representative. located. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of sonably withheld. patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, such defense or loss when a particular design,process or prod- the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents. Howeverjf the Contractor has rea- the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. son to believe that the required design,process or product is an 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for shall be subject to arbitration. such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract ow 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Archi- Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- time to time during the correction period described in Para- ing but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,dam- Owner.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance erty(other than the Work itself)including loss of use resulting with other provisions of the Contract. therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed ing that the Work,when completed, will be in accordance with to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections described in this Paragraph 3.18. to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified Owner informed of progress of the Work,and will endeavor to under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifiea- 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and tion obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by will not be responsible for construction means, methods, a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or techniques,sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor and programs in connection with the Work, since these are under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract w. 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi- of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- 10 A201-1987 AI ADOCOUM87JTHEAMERICANNSTITTUTDEOFARCHITECTS,CONTRACT 1735NEWYORKAVENUE`NWNWAS FOURTEENTH D.C.2000 .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and to conform to the information given and the design concept other expenses contemplated for stated allowance expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4,2.7. not in the allowances; 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review,approve and submit to the 4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by submittals required by the Contract Documents'with reason- !"" Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in tractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. required by the Contract Documents may be returned without 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT action. 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product else Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- dent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- accordance with approved submittals. tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- t" ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product written request in each case. Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or 70 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Con- will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's contained within such submittals with the requirements of the information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. Work and of the Contract Documents. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has cable execution of the Work. specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. tect's approval thereof. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing schedules. or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner the Architect on previous submittals. one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in marked currently to record changes and selections made during the Contract Documents, construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract tR be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi- 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES cations. 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and 3.13 USE OF SITE ON other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per- materials or equipment. formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or equipment for sorne portion of the Work. or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate fit together properly. materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion by which the Work will be judged. of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar sub- Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other- mittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their sub- wise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contrac- mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for for shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL.CONDITIONS OF'rHE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1)87 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 9 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND 3.5 WARRANTY FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be Contract Documents with each other and with information of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit- furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the ments, including substitutions not properly approved and Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con- warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac- wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, for shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor- the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable and quality of materials and equipment. '! costs for correction. 3.6 TAXES 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mea- taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- �w surements and conditions and other information known to the tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall scheduled to go into effect. be reported to the Architect at once. V. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, with with to Paragraph Doc the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections 1W 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor nations concluded. shall be solely responsible for and have control over construe ow tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc- orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the tions concerning these matters. Work. do 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable and their agents and employees,and other persons performing laws,statutes,ordinances, building codes,and rules and regula- .. portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. tions. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per- Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor for shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and form the Fork in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- Contractor. traty to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work bons of Work already performed under this Contract to deter and shall bear the attributable costs. mine that such portions arc in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,materials,equip- by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor heat, utilities, transportation, a shall not be required to employ persons or entities against nd other facilities and services which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. necessary for proper cxecution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: w. rated or to be incorporated in the Work. .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the order among the Contractor's employees and other persons Work; carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit .2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of " employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks materials and equipment delivered at the site and all assigned to them. required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 8 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20000 Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and ments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited facilities. license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such copies of official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for P" nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication execution of the Work. in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved 2,2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- rights. sibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those 1.4 CAPITALIZATION in respect to Article 6(Construction by Owner or by Separate 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include Contractors), Article 9(Payments and Completion) and Article those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- 1 I (Insurance and Bonds). bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subpara- 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other 2,3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in documents published by the American Institute of Architects. accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents 1.5 INTERPRETATION as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner, quently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and arti- by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so cles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac- article is absent from one statement and appears in another is for to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- ARTICLE 2 tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. OWNER 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.1 DEFINITION 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails 00 the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from Documents as if singular in number.The term"Owner" means the Owner to commence and continue correction of such the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may After such seven-day period give the Contractor a second 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and seven-day period. If the Contractor within such second seven- relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a mence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner correct statement of the record legal title to the property on may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or Agreement and, within five days after any change, information thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to REQUIRED OF THE OWNER the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- tect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not no 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor,prior sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time difference to the Owner. thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's OR obligations under the Contract.[Note: Unless such reasonable ARTICLE 3 evidence were furnished on request prior to the execution oJ' the Agreement, the prospective contractor would not be CONTRACTOR required to execute the Agreement or to commence the Work.] 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical 3.1 DEFINITION characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as Such of the Project, and a legal description of the site. in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assess- representative. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. The Contract Documents consist of.the Agreement between 1,2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement),Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), ww 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner Drawings, Specifications,addenda issued prior to execution of [ and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the he Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi- Owner Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu ow,both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change ments upon request. Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the sentation that the Contractor has visited the site,become famil- Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- am documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or formed and correlated personal observations with require- invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the ments of the Contract Documents. Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all so items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are comple- The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. mentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- MP or agreements,either written or oral. The Con- ments and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The to produce the intended results. Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac- 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections wee! tual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Con- and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor or(3)between any persons or entities other than Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the words which have well-known technical or construction indus- Architect's duties. try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- 1.1.3 THE WORK ance with such recognized meanings. The term "Work" means the construction and services 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, DOCUMENTS equipment and services provided or to be provided by the 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents ..e Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- 1.1.4 THE PROJECT tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor,Sub- .w subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or Sub- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other part and which may include construction by the Owner or by documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise separate contractors. indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and w. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights, The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared ules and diagrams. by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- tor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub- ,.. The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 6 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 ele RIP go Rules and Notices for Arbitration ... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience . . .. . . . . . . . . 14.3 Safety of Persons and Property . . . . . . . 10.2 Suspension of the Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7,5.4.2,14.1.1.4, 14.3 Safety Precautions and Programs .. . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3,4.2.7,10.1 Suspension or Termination of the Contract . . . . . . 4.3.7,5.4.1.1, 14 "M Samples,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.3 Taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6,7.3.6.4 Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and . 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Termination by the Contractor . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Samples at the Site,Documents and . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 3.11 Termination by the Owner for Cause. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4:1.1,14.2 Schedule of Values . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2,9.3.l Termination of the Architect 4.1.3 Schedules,Construction . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Termination of the Contractor . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . 14.2.2 Pi• Separate Contracts and Contractors . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4,3.14.2,4.2.4, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT . . . . . . 14 4.5.5,6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Tests and Inspections . . . . . 3.3.3,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2, 12.2.1,13.5 Shop Drawings,Definition of. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.1 TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 8 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples . . . . 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Time,Delays and Extensions of . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 4.3.8,7.2.1,8.3 Site,Use Of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13,6.L1,6.2.1 Time Limits,Specific . . . . . . .. . 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.l 1, 3.15.1, Site Inspections . . .1.2.2,3.3.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.8.2,9.10.1,13.5 4.2.1,4.2.11, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9,8.2,9.2, 9.3.1, Site Visits,Architect's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.6, 9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.8.2, 9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.11, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Special Inspections and Testing . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6, 12.2.1,13.5 Time Limits On Claims. . . . . . . . . 4.3.2,4.3.3,4.3.6,4.3.9,4.4,4.5 W Specifications,Definition of the. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 1.1.6 Title to Work . .. . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . • • • • . 9.3.2,`2 .3.3 Specifications,The . .. . . . . . . . 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.4, 1.3,3.11 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK . . . . . . . 12 Statutes of Limitations.. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 4.5.4.2, 12.2.6,13.7 Uncovering of Work . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Stopping the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,4.3.7,9.7, 10.1.2, 10.3,14.1 Unforeseen Conditions . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 4.3.6,8.3.1,10.1 war Stored Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3-1.4,12.2.4 Unit Prices . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 7.1.4,7.3.3.2 Subcontractor,Definition of. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Use of Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.12.7,5.3 SUBCONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. 5 Use of Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Subcontractors,Work by. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.4,3.3.2,3.12.1, Values,Schedule of . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 9.2,9.3.1 4.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 Waiver of Claims:Final Payment. . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.10.3 00 Subcontractual Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6.2, Waiver of Claims by the Architect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 13.4.2 9.6.3,9.6.4, 10.2.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.2, 14.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor. . . . . . . . . 9.10.4,11.3.7, 13.4.2 Submittals . 1.3,3.2.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, Waiver of Claims by the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.9.3, 7.3.6,9.2,9.3.1,9.8.2, 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.1.3 9.10.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 13.4.2 so Subrogation,Waivers of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1, 11.3.5,11.3.7 Waiver of Liens.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . 9.10.2 Substantial Completion. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.1,8.1.3, Waivers of subrogation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . 6.1.1,11.3.5, 11.3.7 8.2-3,9.8, 9.9.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Warranty and Warranties. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 3.5,4.2.9, Substantial Completion,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.1 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.2,9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 Substitution of Subcontractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 5.2.3,5.2.4 Weather Delays. . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.8.2 Substitution of the Architect. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 When Arbitration May Be Demanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 4.5.4 Substitutions of Materials . . 3.5.1 Work,Definition of . . . I . . .I . . I . I . . . . . . . .. .. .. I . .. . . . 1.1.3 Sub-subcontractor,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Written Consent . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4, Subsurface Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 4.5.5,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 10.1.2, 10.1.3, Successors and Assigns 13.2 1 1.3.1, 11.3-1.4, 1 1.3.1 1, 13 2, 13.4.2 Superintendent . . . ... . . : . 3.9, 10.2.6 Written Interpretations . . . . .. . . . . I . . . . .. . . 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 Supervision and Construction Procedures . . . . . . 1.2.4,3.3,3.4, Written Notice . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3,4.4.4, 4.2.3, 4.3.4,6.1.3,6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, lo, 12, 14 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.1.2, Surety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1,4.4.4,5.4.1.2,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Surety,Consent of. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Written Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 2.3,3.9,4.3.7, Surveys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2,3.18.3 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2, 135.2, 14.3.1 Ism "a lew an AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201.1987 5 .a Limitations of Liability . . . . . 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.11, Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.10.4, Award Separate Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.3.7, 13.4.2, 13.5.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,4.3.7 Limitations of Time,General . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1,2.2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3, Owner's Right to Suspend the Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 no 3.8.2, 3.1e l . . . , 3.15.1,. . . . . 2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.3.2, Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. 14.2 4.3.3, 4.3.4,4.3.6, 4.3.9, .5, .2, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.4, 7.3.4, 7.4, Ownership and Use of Architects Drawings, Specifications 8.2,9.5,9.6.2,9.3 9.9,5.4.2 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 4, 7.5, and Other Documents. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,5.3 I i.3.6, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, .2, 1 3.5, Partial Occupancy or Use . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.11 Patching,Cutting and . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14,6.2.6 io Limitations of Time,Specific . . . . .. . . . 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11, Patents,Royalties and . . . . .. . . . . . . . 3.17 3.15.1,4.2.1,4.2.11,4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4,7.3.5,7.3.9, 8.2, Payment,Applications for . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5,9.2,9.3,9.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 9.5.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 14.2.4 11.3.10, 11.3.1 1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Payment,Certificates for. . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5, no Loss of Use Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.3 9.6.1, 9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Material Suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1, Payment,Failure of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7,9.5.1.3, 9.3.1, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3,9.4.2, 9.6.5, 9.10.4 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Materials,Hazardous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1,10.2.4 Payment,Final . . . . . . . . . .. . 4.11,4.2.9,4.3.2,4.3.5,9.10, 11.1.2, Materials,Labor,Equipment and . . . . . 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2, 11.1.3, 1 1.3.5, 12.3.1 00 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1,4.2.7,6.2.1, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 7.3.6.4, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Payments,Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4,9.3,9.6, Procedures of Construction. . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1,4.2.3,4.2.7,9.4.2 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 40 Minor Changes In the Work. . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.1,7.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . 13 Payments to Subcontractors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-2,9.5-1.3, Modifications,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 1 1.3.8, 14.2.1.2 Modifications to cite Contract . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1,1.l.2,3.7.3,3.1 1, PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.6.4, a" Mutual Responsibility . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Permits,Fees and Notices . . . . . . . 2.2.3,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of . . . . . . . . 2.3.1, PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 4.3.5,9.5.2, 9.8.2, 12, 13.7.1.3 Polychlorinated Biphenyl . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Io.I tw Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,2.4,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.3,3.7.4,3.9,3.12.8, Product Data,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.112 3.12.9, 3.17, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2,9.4.1, Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings . . . . 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 9.5.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 1 1.3, 12.2.2, Progress and Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . I . . I . . . 4.2.2,4.3.4,8.2 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14 Progress Payments 4.3.-1,9.3, Notice,Written . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3, 9.6, 9.8.3,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 w 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 9.10, Project,Definition of the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4 10.1.2, 10.2.6, l 1.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Project Manual,Definition of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 1.1.7 Notice of Testing and Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Project Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ' 5 Notice to Proceed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.2.2 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Notices,Permits,Fees and . . . . . . 2.2.3,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2,2 Property Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2.5,11.3 Observations,Architect's On-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.5, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Regulations and Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . L3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5, Observations,Contractor's. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2,3.2.2 4.5.7, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13 1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Occupancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.8.1,9.9, 1 1.3.11 Rejection of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1,4.2.0, 12.2 On-Site Inspections by the Architect . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6, Releases of Waivers and Liens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10.2 9.4.2,9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1 Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7, On-Site Observations by the Architect . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6, 6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, 9.8.2,9.10.1 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 135 Representatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9, Orders,Written 2.3,3.9,4.3.7,7,82?, 11.3.9,12.1, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4,45 OWNER, . . . . . . . . . . 2 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work . . . . , . . . . . . . 3.3?, Owner,Definition of 4 2.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 10 2.1 Rctainagc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.1 o.2,9.10.5 Owner,Information and Services Required of the. . . . . . . . ?.I.2, Review of Contract Documents and Field 2.2, 4.3.4, 6, 9, 1 0.1.4, 1 1?, 1 1.3, 13.5.1, 14.1.15, 14.1.3 Conditions by Contractor. . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2,3.2,3.7.3.3.12 Owner's Authority . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1,4,1.3,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, Review of Contractor's Submittals by 7.3-1, 8.2.2,9.3.1, 9.3?, 11.4.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 14.2, 14.3.1 Owner and Architect 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.1 2, Owner's Financial Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1, 14.1.1.5 4.2.7, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.8.1 Owner's Liability Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data Owner's Loss of Use Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.3 and Samples by-Contractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.5 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . 1.1.2, Rights and Remedies . . . . I . . . I . . . . 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15?, 5.2.1, 5.4.1, 9.6.4 4.2.6, 4.3.6, 4.5, 5.3,6.1,6.3, 7.3.1,8.3.1,95.1,9.7, 10.2.5, ' Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work . . . . . . . . 2.4, 1.. Owner's Right to Clean Up . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Royalties and Patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUC.'14ON• FOURTEENTH EDITION " 4 A701-1987 AIA® 1@ 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 ew CONTRACTOR . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 3 Emergencies . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . 4.3.7,10.3 Contractor,Definition of . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1,6.1.2 Employees,Contractor's . . .. . . . . . . 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.1, Contractor's Bid.. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 1.1.1 3.18.2, 4.2.3,4.2.6,8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules . . . . . . . . .. . . . 3.10,6.1.3 Equipment,Labor,Materials and . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1, Contractor's Employees . . . . . . . 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18,4.2.3, 3.8.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 Contractor's Liability Insurance. . . .. . . . 222 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . 11.1 Execution and Progress of the Work . . . . . . . I.1.3, 1.2.3,3.2,3.4.1, ws Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.5.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.8,6.2.2, 7.1.3, and Owner's Forces . . . . . . 2.2.6,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6,12.2.5 7.3.9, 8.2, 8.3, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2, 14.3 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors . . . . . . . 1.2.4,3.3.2, Execution, Correlation and Intent of the 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4,9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 Contract Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 1.2,3.7.1 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect . . . . 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, Extensions of Time . . . . . . . . .. . . . 4.3.1,4.3.8,7.2.1.3,8.3,10.3.1 3.3.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.11, 3.12.8 3.16, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, Failure of Payment by Contractor . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 95.1.3, 14,2.1.2 4.2.12, 5.2,6.2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Failure of Payment by Owner .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 4.3.7,9.7, 14.1.3 Contractor's Representations. . 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3 Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Contractor's Responsibility for Those Final Completion and Final Payment . . . . . . . . 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2, No Performing the Work . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3, 10 4.3.5,9.10, 11.1.2, 11-1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1, 13.7 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents . . . . . . 1.2.2,3.2,3.7.3 Financial Arrangements,Owner's. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 2.2.1 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 9.7 Fite and Extended Coverage Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Contractor's Submittals . . . . . . . 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, Governing aw 13.1 pa 7.3.6,9.2, 9.3.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, 9 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Guarantees(See Warranty and Warranties) Contractor's Superintendent . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 3.9, 10.2.6 Hazardous Materials. . . . Documents ents . . . . .. . . . . . . . 10.1, 11.2.4 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures. . . . . . 1.2.4, Identification of'Con[ract Documents . 1.2.1 3.3, 3.4, -4.2 i, 8.2.2, 8.2.3, I0 Identification of Suhamtracu>rs and Suppliers . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Contractual Liability Insurance. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . l 1.1.1.7, 11.2.1 Indemnification. . . . . . . 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.1.4, 11.3-1.2, 11.5.7 Coordination and Correlation . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 11. 11.7, 1.2.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner. . . . . 2.1.2,2.2, 3.. . 3.12.7,621.3, 6.2.1 4.3.4, 6.1.3, 6.1.4,6.2.6, 9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.8.3, 9.9.2, Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications . . . 1.3,2.2.5,3.11 9or Pr arty . 11.2, 1 1.3, 13.5.1,. . 135.2 ON Correction of Work 2.3,2.4,4.2.l,9.8.2, Injury or Damage to Person or Property . .. . . . . . . . . . 4.3.9 2222 . . . . . . 2 .9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 13.7.1.3 Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3,3.3.4,3.7.1,4.2.2, Cost,Definition of . , 7.3.6, .7.3.5 4.2.6, 4.2.9,4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.91, 9.10.1, 135 Costs 2.4,3.2.1,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.8.1,5.2.3, Instructions to Bidders. . . or. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;.2.1, . . .1, L 1.1 6.1.1,6.2.3,6.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7 iJ,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, l 1.3.L2, Instructions to the Contractor 2222 3.8.1,41.8,51.1,7, 13.1, 13.51 11.3.1.3, .3,7. ,11.,7. 1 ,7. 12.2.1, 12.2.4, .10.2,,1.3- 14 Insurance. . . . . . . 4.3"9.6.1.1,7.3.6.4,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, 11 Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 11,3.2 Cutting and Patching.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14,6.2.6 insurance,Contractor's Liability 11.1 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, • ' 6.2.4, 9.5.1.5, 101.L2, 10.2.5, 10.3, I L 1, 1 I.3, 12.2.5 Insurance,Effective Date of � 2222 . . • • 8.2.2, 1 1.1 1 Damage to the Work . .. . . 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2.5, 10.3, 11.3 Insurance,Loss of Use. . .y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 l.3.3 Damages,Claims for . . .9.18,4.3.9,6.1.1,6.2-5,8-3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Insurance,Owner's Liability. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 11.2 2222 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7 Insurance,Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.25,11.3 Damages for Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance,Stored Materials 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of. 8.l.2 Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3 INSURANCE AND BONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 •o Day,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.4 Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy . .9.9.1, 1 1.3.1 1 Decisions of the Architect . . . . . . 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, Insurance Companies,Settlement with. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 10 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1,4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2, Intent of the Contract Documents . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 . . . 1.2.3,3.12.-1, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification . . . . . . . . . . 9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 Interest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Interpretation. 1.2.5,1.4,1.5,-4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.-1 Rejection and Correction of . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,2.4,35.1,4.2.1, Interpretations,Written 4.2.11,-f.2.12,4.3.- 4.2.6,4.3.5,95.2,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.2.5, 12, 13.7.1.3 p 3.5.1 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . +.5.�� Defective Work,Detinition of 4.5.1,45.4.1,4.5.7 Definitions. . . . . . L 1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12,.1,3.1..'.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, Judgment on Final Award . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1. 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment 2 2 2 2 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.6 2 Delays and Extensions of Time . . .. . . . . . . 4.3.1,-1.3.8.1, 4.3.8.2, 3.1?', i.12.3, j 12--, 3.12.1 1. 3.13, 3.1�) 1, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,7.3.4. 7.3.5, 7.3.8, 4.2,7, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9,3.2, 9.3.3, 12.2.-1. 1-+ 7 3.9, 8.1.1,8.3, 10.3.1, 14.1.1.4 Lahor Disputes . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 FPO Disputes . . . . . . . . . . i.1.4,4.3, +4,4 5,6.2.5,, 1 7.i 8,9.3.11 Laws and Regulations . . . 1.3,3.6,3.",3.13,4.1.1,,i.5.5,4.5 ?, Documents and Samples at the Site .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13-5.1, .3.3, 13.6 Drawings,Definition of . 1.1.5 Liens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11,4.3',4.35.1, . . . . 9.3.3, 4.5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of. . . . . L 1.1, l 3, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.5.5 on 2.25, 3.11, 5.3 Limitations,Statutes of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.4?, 13.2.6, 13 Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions. . . . . 3.2 Limitations of Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1,4.1.2,4.2.1, Effective Date of Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2, l 1.1.2 4.2.3,4.2.7, 4.2.10, 5.2.2, 5.2.4, 7.4, 1 1.3.10 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF"1'HE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION A201.1987 3 AlA© •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 INDEX Acceptance of Nonconforming Work . . . . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 Building Permit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Acceptance of Work . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3 Capitalization.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Access to Work. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.2 Accident Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3, 10 Certificates for Payment. . . . . . . 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1, Acts and Omissions . . . 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.2, 9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 so 4.3.9, 8.3.1, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval . . . . . 3.12.11, 13.5.4 Addenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1,3.11 Certificates of Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3 Additional Cost,Claims for . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1, 10.3 Change Orders. . . . . . 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.8.2.4,3.11,4.2.8,4.3.3,5.2.3, Additional Inspections and Testing. .. . . . . 4.2.6,9.8.2, 12.2.1,13.5 7.1,7.2, 7.3.2,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 11.3.1.2, ate Additional Time,Claims for. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT . . . . . . . 3.3.3,4,9.4,9.5 Change Orders,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Changes. . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Aesthetic Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.13,4.5.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK . . . . 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 10.1.3 w Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Claim,Definition of. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 All-risk Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.1.1 Claims and Disputes 4.3,4.4,4.5,6.2.5,8.3.2, Applications for Payment . . 4.2.5,7.3.7,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.1.4 9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.1.3, 14.2.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.5.6 Approvals . . . . 2.4,3.3.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12.4 through 3.12.8,3.18.3, Claims for Additional Cost. .. . . . . . 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1,10.3 *A 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Claims for Additional Time.. . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 Arbitration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4,4.3.2,4.3.4,4.4.4,4.5, Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 8.3.1, 1 0.1.2, 1 1.3.9, 11-3.10 Claims for Damages. . .3.18,4.3.9,6.1.1,6.2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.1 Claims Subject to Arbitration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2,4.4.4,4.5.1 Architect,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Cleaning Up . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15,6.3 Architect,Extent of Authority. .. . . . . . 2.4,3.12.6,4.2,4.3.2,4.3.6, Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.2,9.3.1, Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to . . . . . . . 2.1.2, 9.,i, 9.5,9.6.3,9.8.2,9.8-3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 1.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.7, 5.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 6.2.2,8.1.2, 8.2.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 40 Architect,limitations of Aurhority and Responsibility . 3.3.3,3.12.8, Commencement of the Work,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 3.12.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1,4.2.2,4.2.3, 4.2.6,4.2.7, 4.2.10,4.2.12, Communications Facilitating Contract 4.2.13, 4.3.2, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1,4.2.4,5.2.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses . . . . . . . . . . 2.4,9.8.2, Completion,Conditions Relating to . . . . . . . 3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9, 1 1.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 4.3.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 ow Architect's Administration of the Contract. . . . . . . . . . 4.2,4.3.6, COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 4.3.7, 4.4,9.4, 9.5 Completion,Substantial. . . . . . . . . 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3, Architect's Approvals 2.4,3.5.1,3.10.2,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.18.3,4.2.7 9.8,9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13? Architect's Authority to Reject Work . . . . 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Compliance with Laws . . . . . . 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, a, Architect's Copyrigl it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 11.3, 13.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Architect's Decisions. . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, Concealed or Unknown Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3,8.3.1, Conditions of the Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1, 1,1.7,6.1.1 9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Consent,Written . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1?, Architect's Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.4.2,9.8.2, 4.3.4,4.5.5,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,10.1.2, 10.1.3, 9.92, 9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2, 13.4.2 Architect's Instructions. . 4.2.6,4.2.7/,,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.4.1,12.1,13.5.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE Architect's Interpretations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3,7 CONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4,6 Architect's On-Site Observations . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6,9.4.2, Construction Change Directive,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 e� 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Construction Change Directives . . . . 1.1.1,4.2.8,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.t Architect's Project Representative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.10 Construction Schedules,Contractor's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 o,6.1.3 Architect's Relationship with Contractor . . . . . . . 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 3.3-3. 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, Continuing Contract Performance 4.3.4 4.2.6, 4.2.12, 5.2, 6?.2, 7.3.4, 9.8.2, 1 1.3.7, 12.1, 135 Contract,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors. . . . 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4, CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR 4.2.6,9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7 SUSPENSION OF THE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Architect's Representations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Contract Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3,4,9.4,9.5 Architect's Site Visits . . . . . . . . 4.2.2,-f.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.4.2,9.5.1, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to . . . . . . 3.7.1, rra 9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1, 135 3.10, 5.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Asbestos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1o.1 Contract Documents,The . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.2, Attorneys'Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18.l,9.10.2, 10.1 4 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of. . . 1.3,2 25,5.3 Award of Separate Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Contract Documents,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.I.l Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Contract Performance During Arbitration. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4,4.5.3 go Portions of the Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Contract Sum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.4.4,5.2.3, Basic Definitions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 6.1.3, 7.2, 7.3,9.1 9.7, 11.3.1, 12.2.4, 12.3, 14?.4 Bidding Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.4.1 Contract Sum,Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3.2 Contract Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.4.4,7.2.1-3,7.3, o„ Bonds,Lien . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10.2 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.7, 12.1.1 Bonds,Performance and Payment. . . . . 7.3.6.4,9.10.3, 1 1.3.9, 11.4 Contract Time,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS 01.1111' ONTRACT'FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDI'T'ION 00 2 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 40 T T H E A M E R I C A N I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T PX JIM +wl AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK CONTRACT r� This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918,1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963,1966, 1967, 1970, 1976,©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue,N.W.,Washington,D.C.,20006.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 1 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, f-r-ming part of the Contract Documents are as foLlows: (List/sere any additional doc'rnnents tvbtct,are i»tennded hi form parl of the Contract Documents. 7be General Conditions provide tbal bidding requirements sucb as advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated w in this Agreement. 775.7 should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) t#R �Ils wIr UMn sm up no am am an 4W This Agreement is entered into as of the clay and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which one is to be delivered to the Contnictor,one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract,and the remainder to the Owner. O\K'NER CONTRACTOR r"�r,�u;rlurc"j (.Sr,t;ttrNrtrt�; r� %(Tintea name and Lille) (Printed nai re and t,Nt,) AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWN ER•CONTRACTOK A(JREEMENT • 1'WFL!'"I'H EDITION • MAO • ©1987 TI IF.AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARC)IITECTS, 1 735 NEW Y011 AVENIIF.,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A101-1987 C �w 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different dace is shown below: (£itber list the Drawings here or refer to an esbibit attached to ibis agreement.) M Number Title Date ttw + as 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any, arc :Ls follows: Number Date Pages w Portions of Addenda relating w bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements arc also enumerated in this Article 9. AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA* ° 01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 Al OT=1987 7 ARTICLE 9 *�* ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: eft 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,ALA Document A101, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition, 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are chose contained in the Project Manual dated and are as follows: Document Title Pages w>s+i .0 �w w 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 9.1.3, and are as follows: (!'itber list the Specifications here or re/er to all estrihit attached to Ibis Agreement.) Section Title Pages w� w a. .A AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA• • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUF,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A101.1987 6 ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT t Final payment,constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when(1) the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements,if any, which necessarily survive final payment;and(2)a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect;such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document,the ref- to erence refers to that provision as amended or Supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below,or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. /Insert rate of interest agreed upon. if any.1 (Usury(rocs and requirements wider the Federat Tnnb in Lending Act,similar state•and local consumer credit laws and other regutaliw+s at the tht•ner's and 40 Contractor's principal places of hu.ciness, tar location of the Project and else•wbere ma 1'affect The calidilr of Ibis prot•t.cton.Legal advice sboidd he obtetined with rt'spect to tlelelloar or mudnlicooems. and alvo regarding regmreme ras su<'b as written disclosures or treore•r.s J 7.3 Other provisions: on ARTICLE 8 tW TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 I he o.Owr.ir; ntav ix ;e nnin:uc l in the 0�vncr nr the C.(,mracior as provided in Am(lc I i n( (11c (;moral (.ondui )n, 8.2 The vX•nrk m;ry he ,u�hend(-d by the nor ;is provided in Article 1-+ of the (,cncral ('-)ndino w, AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER CONTRAC'T'OR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA° x1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, I'15 NEW PORK AVENUE.N.W.WASHINGTON,D C.20006 A101-1987 5 ..11 ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and as elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month,or as follows: ■w .w 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than w the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This Schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work,amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order; 5.6.2. Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable w materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site or subsequent incorpomrion in the completer)construction(or, if approved in advance by the Owner,suitably stored off the " site:u a location agreed upon in writing),less rc•tainagc of percent ( 'y"); 5.6.3 Subtract the aggrcgatc of Previous payments uladc by talc Owncr; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for -,vhich the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in P:n: graph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 'I'hc progress payment anu,unt (Ictefniined in accordance with Paragraph 5.G shall he tlirlher modified under III,-' foll(m ink circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to percent( %)of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and additlun;tl amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of rctainagc, if any, shall be as follows: (/J N o tn;(vtded, prior lu.Subatanfial(.omptetiurt of lh(•e1111 7 )Pol k. io redtvice or!unit thr retamage resunitig from the Pei cenlagcs inserter/in Suopwit w graphs 5.0./and 5.G.?abure. and/his is tut e.rpluilted el.eemhore At the(.imrtract Documents, insert bere provisions fur such reducn-11 or itmuluion j wMR ■Ilu AIA DOCUMENT Alai - OWNER CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - TWELFTH PDI1'I0N - AIAc - -1987 THf'.ANIFNICAN INSTITl)Tli UPARCHITECTS, 17iS NEW PURE;AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D C 2(10(X) A101-1987 4 � ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of Dollars (s ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Con- tract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: otate the numbers or otber identification of accepted alternates. if decisiwts on other alternates are to be made by rbe Owner subsequent to the execution o/ ibis Agreement„attacb a scbedule of such otber alternates sbneang the amount for each and the date until mhtcb tbat amount is valid.) 4.3 Unit prices, if any. arc as follows 1�w tw 04 AIA DOCUMENT A101 „s';F.R(.ONTRACTOR AGRIIE.MENI INX'F.I.I`1H EDITION AIA4 719H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, I-i5 NEXX'PORK AVENt!E,N W,WASHINGTON,D.C. ZNxK) A101.1987 3 w ARTICLE t THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract,and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and we supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents. other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. w ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: eeR aru wA sw ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured,and shall be the date of this Agreement,as first written above,unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement, if it differs front the date of this,agreement or, if applicable, state tbat the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) + Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (Insert the calendar date or number of L(dendar del s after the duly of commencement.Also insert any requirements for earlier Substantial completion of cer twin portions of the Work, if not stated elsewbet iu the c:o,nruct Do(unients.) irrn irk ,LtjCCt to :Idiustmcm,) o>I this (.nntract Time as piovided in the Contract Documents. AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGRF.EME-NT • TWELF-1-11 EDITION • AIAb • ©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2u0W A101-1987 2 H E A M E R I C A N 1 N S T I T U T E 0 F A R C H 1 T E i AIA Document ,4101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM 1987 EDITION THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. The 1987 Edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of Nineteen Hundred and BETWEEN the Owner: (A'ame and address) and the Contractor: !.Vomv turd address) The Project is: (A'cura-and tuuul(u) The Architect is: (A'arne and address) Tht Omer and Contractor agree as set forth below. Copvnght 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, ©1987 by The American Institute of Archi teas. 1735 New York Avcnuc, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without wnttcn permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United Stares and will be subject to IcFal prosecution +A AIA DOCUMENT A101 - OWNER CONTRACrUR AGREEMENT - TWELFFIi EDITION - AIAm - (c)19N7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(O(Xr A101-1987 1 SUPPLEMENT TO AIA DOCUMENT A701 , INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS This supplement sets forth modifications to AIA document A701 , Instructions to Bidders . The paragraph designations listed below refer to the A701 paragraphs modified. All other unmodified paragraphs shall remain in effect. 4 . 2 . 1 . - Delete the paragraph in its entirety and insert in its place: A bid bond or bid security shall not be required. 4 . 2 . 2 . - Delete the paragraph in its entirety and insert in its place : A surety bond or letter of credit shall not be required. 4 . 2 . 3 . - Delete the paragraph in its entirety. 7 . 1 . 1 . - At end of sentence, add sentences : Bidder is not required ! ! to furnish performance or payment bonds . However, bidder shall be capable of providing performance and payment bonds , as a condition for submittal of bid. END OF SECTION 00110 Instructions to Bidders Supplement 1 furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall Contract. he added to the Hid in de(crmining the Contract Suni. 7,1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact wht) executes the required bonds than the Bidder's usual sources,changes in cost will be adjusted on behalf of the surety to ally• as provided in the Contract Documents. thereto a certified and Current copy of the pun er of aIIonr. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS � 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the ARTICLE 8 Owner not later than three days following the date of execution FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto OWNER AND CONTRACTOR in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to com- mencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in 8.1 FORM TO BE USED accordance with this Subparagraph 7.3.1. 7.2.2 Unless other-wise provided, the hands ,hall he written 8.1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents. on AIA Document A312, Performance bond and Payment the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Con- AIUI, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Con- tract Sum. tractor Where the Basis of Pavment Is a Stipulated Sum. A�14 AIA DOCUMENT A701 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS• FOURTH EDITION• AIAS (J 198' • THE 5 A701-1987 AMERICAN INSTITUTE.OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N W,WASHINGTON,D C ?Vh,R) and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bid. agrees in submitting a Bid. ding Documents. 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY +� the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the 6.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.A change Bids' furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations Bid. under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is fur- nished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agree- ,,,m 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may he resubmitted up to the date and ment between the Owner and Contractor. time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 6.3 SUBMITTALS 4.4.4 Bid security, if requited,shall be in an amount sufficient 6.3.1 The Bidder shall,as soon as practicable after notification me for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the ww ARTICLE 5 Bidder's own forces; CONSIDERATION OF BIDS .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the sup- pliers of principal items or systems of materials and 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS equipment proposed for the Work; and rw .3 names of persons or entities(including those who arc 5.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or In Vita- to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a Lion to Bid, the properly identifies! Bids received on time will special design)proposed for the principal portions of be opened publicly and will be read aloud. An abstract of the the Work. no Bids will be made available to Bidders. When it has been stated that Bids will be opened privately,an abstract of the same inf)r- 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfac- mation may, at the discretion of the Owner, be made available Lion of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibil- to the Bidders within a reasonable time. ity of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform watt the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 6.3.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will 5.2.1 ']'lie the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, he t hvncr shall have the right to rcjcxt any or all llicls, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or no reject a Bid not accompanied h)•a rcquircd hid security or by entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect h; other data required by the Bidding; DOC1.1111Cnts, or reject a Bid reasonable objection a)a proposed person or entiry,thc• Bii! which is in any Nvay incomplete or irregUlar. may, at the Bidder's option,(1)withdraw the Bid,or(2)su! an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustnic! w" 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) the Base Bid or Alternate laid to cover the difference: in occasioned by such Substitution. The Owner may aces])[ th_ 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the adjusted bid price or disqualify [lie Bidder. In the event i,I lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security, will not be •. in accordance with the requirements of[lie Bidding Documents forfeited. and does not exceed the funds available.•fhe Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and t,and to accept the Bid which,in the Owner's judgincnt,is in the whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable am Owner's own best interests. objection must be used on the Work for which the), •ere pro- posed and shall not be changed except with the written con- 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to :icccpt Alternates in sent of the Owner and Architect. any order or combination, unless otherwisc .specifically pro- vided in the Bidding Documents,and to determine the low Bid- .� dcr on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates ac- cepted. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND +■* ARTICLE 6 PAYMENT BOND POST-BID INFORMATION 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT furnish hon I.sacovering[fit faithful gc)perf(rnanrec Bfcther("A) 6.1.1 Bidders ui whore ,nsard ut a (.ontract is under ct)t)- tract ;uld payn)cnt of all obligations arising thereunder bond, sidcrarion shrill .submit to the Architect, upon request, a prop- n'ay be secured through the Bidders usual souses 11" crly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bid- Statdment, unless such a Sritcmcnt hats been previously ding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INs'I'HU(:'ilUNti'Il)ISIUI>I?HS• FoUHI'll til)I'I'IUN• AIA^ • 019• 1tIE AMERICAN INSI'il'U'I'F.c)F ARCFIII'EC'I'S, 17j5 NIiW 1'UItK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGI'oN,p.C.1Wg6 A701-1987 4 dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed of the bid security,state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of substitution. less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder.The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form � 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor,part- equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete nership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be description of the proposed substitution including.drawings, signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the performance and test data,and other information necessary for Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other mate- the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.A rills, equipment or other portions of the Work including Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the _ the proposed substitution would require shall be included.The Bidder. burden of proof of Elie merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or dis- 4.2 BID SECURITY approval of a proposed substitution shall he final. 4.2.1 If so stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. 3.3.3 if the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior or supplementary instructions to bidders, each Bid shall In- to receipt of Bids, such approval n•ill he set forth in an Addcn- accompanied by a hid security in the form ind anitw- ' po dum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals tn:ldc in any other required, pledging that the Bidder will enter into a Cunt! manner. with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and 3.3.4 No substitutions will be cvnsidcrcti after the Contract required, furnish bond covering.the faithful performmn: c the Contract and payment of all obligations arisir.st tllrreuncr.:. award unless specifically provided in the(:ontract'Documents. Should the Bidder rehlse to enter into such Contract ..r i.m ; furnish such bonds if retuired, the:unount of iLc bid >rcunt% 3.4 ADDENDA shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, nut :Ls a penalty.The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited u: 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Sub- known by the issuing office to have received a complete soft of paragraph 6.2.1. Bidding Documents. 4.2.2 if a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the wherever Bidding Documents arc on file for that purpose. Bidding Documents,and the attorney-in-fact who executes the 3.4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing and current copy of the power of attorney. the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security the date for receipt of Bids. of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Rid that (a)the Contract has been executed and bonds,if required,have the Bidder has received all Addenda issued,and the Bidder shall been furnished, or (b) the specified time h:Ls elapsed so that !11 -their receipt in the Bid. :ICknowlcdgc: Bids may be withdrawn, or(c)all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS ARTICLE 4 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid,the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be BIDDING PROCEDURES enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified 40 with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS applicable, the designated portion of the Work for ;vhich the 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope iu�_i.ded with the Bidding Documents. shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the noia- 40 "SEALED BID ENCLOSED'' on the face thereof. 4.1.2 All blanks on Elie bid firm shall he filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the po 4.1.3 where so indicated by the makeup of the hid form,sums time and date for receipt of [lids will be returned unopened. >h:dl be expressed in both words and figures,and in case of dis- crepancv between the [Wt , the amount written in words shall 4.3.3 The Bidder shall :assume full responsibility for nniei\ govern. delivery a[ the location designated for receipt of Bids. 40 4.1.4 Interline:mons, altcmtions and cr:i.sL1fCS must he initialed 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and rl h\ the "Igncr of the Bill not receive con.sidcmiion. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall he hip; it no -hJ119c ill the fly B.Lse Bid is required, enter ' No C:hamgc 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL Of BID 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated pomons of the 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled h% Work have been requested, the Bidder rnav, without forfeiture the Bidder during the stipulated time period follon in¢the time P—P AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRIVTIONS TO BIDDERS• I-OL'RTit EDITION• AIA J 1,) - TfIE 3 A701-1987 \>11:1tl(:AN INSI'tl•U'rli OF ARCHITECTS,1'i5 NE\C'1'ORK A\'ENL'E.N\C',\X AiHINCTON.D(: 'vu K INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 has correlated the Bidder's personal obsen-ations with t11( DEFINITIONS requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials,equipment and sv, 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and tems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid ARTICLE 3 form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The pro- BIDDING DOCUMENTS posed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the chvner and Contractor, Conditions of the Con- 3.1 COPIES tract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Draw- ings,Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Docu- the Contract. ments from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if 1,2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Con- any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders tract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Con- who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents tract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The 1.3 Addencta are written or graphic instruments issued by the cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's clarifications or corrections. deposit will be refunded. ! 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub- Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance bidders or others unless specifically offered in the Advertise- with the Bidding Documents. ment or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to , bidders. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sun)stated in the Bid for which the Bid- der offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Docu- 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in nients as the base, to which Work may be added or from which preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes Work may he deleted for sums st:ued in Alternate Bids. responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the ■r use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base 3.1.4 In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the Bidding DOC11111e11ts, is acrcpted. the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for :tny other use of the Bidding 1.7 A Unit Trice is :u) anunnit Stated in the Bid as a l)ricc per Documents. unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a am portion of the Work as described in the Bidding DOCLIments. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who Suhnli(S:I bid to a 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bid- am liiddcr for m:tteriais, equipment or labor tin- a p(mion of the (ling Documents with each other, and Nvith other work being Work. hid concurrently Or presently finder COIISLMCtlol) to file CXICIlt that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is Submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once rcpoit ARTICLE 2 to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or:unbiguities discoorrrd w. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3.2.2 BidderS and Suh-hioldCrS requiring clarification r,r i pretation of the Bidding Documents shall mike• ;I ; 2.1 The 13iddes by making :t Bill represrnls that request which shall reach the Architect at least se en cla,. w to the date for receipt of Nds. 2.1.1 The liiddcr has read and understands the Bidding Docu- 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections :uici ch:ulgcs <lf the i lddi;lti� merits and the .lid is made in accordance therewith. Documents will be made by Addendum. Interllrcr.uiun� �nr. .w 2.1.2 Thl: hats react and understands the bidding Docu- recuons and changes of the Bidding D(xtur;cnts made In . ;r � ,(l the extent th:u such d(Icu- other manncr will not he binding. An(' Ill( X")l k I,,r .cluch the Hid is tiuhnliltcd upon thc:,l ,! nilr�r I>i�r!iurl;(>I the !'rnjcil ii .111v, hcin}; !lid coniuncntly. ■I�tt ur JlIdCr construction 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 2.1.3- The liiddcr has visited the site, hcc()nc I;nllili:u with 3.3.1 The naterials, products and equipment descrihed ill !u local conditions under which the Work Is to be perlilrn cd and Bidding Documents establish a standard of required fun�ts:,i AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS• FOURTi1 t[Dil'ION• AIA* • ©19V•THE AMERICAN INSI ITUTE OF ARCHITECr1, 17 i NEW YORK AVENUE,N W.WASHINGTON,D C.2006 A701-1987 2 H E A M E R i C A N i N S T I T U T E 0 F A R C H I T E C f AIA Dcxumcmt 4701 40 Instructions to Bidders 1987 EDITION ; TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. DEFINITIONS h. POST-BID INFORMATION 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OV*",". 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES AND CONTRACTOR CONSIDERATION OF BIDS Lupyngh� ly7U, I'J%•+, !)?ti, �.�!yN7 by 'Ihc Amcncan lnstitutc of Archi[ccts, I'j5 New York A�'enuc. `:.:k' u'ashtnK[on, D.C. 20000. Rcproduction cif the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without w nucn permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to IcgA prosecution AIA DOCUMENT A701 - 11NSTRUKCTIONS TO BIDDERS- FOURTH EDITION - AIA'° - L%1987- THE 8701.1987 1 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1'<5 NEW YORK AVENUE,N la'.WASHINGTON,D C.2LOX ow VP specified. 3 . The Bidder agrees that the Bidder shall , if notified of Bid so acceptance by mail , telegram or delivered notice , execute a contract in the prescribed form on the day and at the time specified in the Notification of Bid Acceptance , such date to be •A not less than 10 days subsequent to the date of notification, nor more than 20 days subsequent to bid opening unless by mutual consent between Bidder and Owner. no 4 . The bidder agrees , if awarded the Contract , to commence the work within ten calendar days after the date of execution of the construction contract . we 5 . In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by Valley CDC to reject any and all bids ; and in the event •* the lowest responsible bid is too high to permit the award of a construction contract, and acceptable reductions in the work can be identified and monetized by Owner and Selected Bidder, a deductive change order reflecting such reductions may be proposed to the Selected Bidder for concurrent execution with the construction contract. 6 . The undersigned certifies that he/she is duly authorized to bind the Bidder to the terms and conditions of this bid proposal . WARNING: U. S . Criminal Code, Section 1001 , Title 18 U. S.C . provides as follows : Whoever, in any matter within the jurisdiction of any department or agency of the United States knowingly and willfully falsifies, conceals or covers up by any ..� trick, scheme or device a material fact , or makes or uses any false writing or document knowing the same to contain any false , fictitious or fraudulent statement of entry, shall be fined not more than $10 , 000 or imprisoned not more than five years , or both. Signed, Title Date : General Bid Form 00300 2 GENERAL BID FORM To : Valley Community Development Corporation 16 Armory Street Northampton, MA 01060 Bid for: THE MAPLES - Eleven Unit Rooming House 16 North Maple Street Renovations Florence, MA "! Bidder: Name Address City State Zip Phone Sir/Madam: 1 . The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of work, and with the bid package ( including me Invitation for Bids , Instructions to Bidders , this General Bid Form, Form of Contract, General Conditions , Supplemental Conditions , Special Conditions , Technical Specifications, and Drawings ) and Addenda thereto, as prepared by Edy Ambroz , Architect and on file at the office of Vallel y CDC, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required to construct and complete the project, as described in the Invitation • for Bids ( including the contents of all documents on file ) , all in accordance therewith for a Base Bid of ($ ? . The above bid acknowledges Addenda numbers The above bid acknowledges Allowances Allowances specified. Alternate #1 Bid Cost: ( $ } . Itemization Cost : As part of the Base Bid amount indicated above , provide a separate line item cost for all types of insulation, vapor retarders , and storm windows purchase and installation, including overhead and profit . Itemization Cost ( included in Base Bid amount ) : ( $ } . 2 . The Bidder will complete the work within the time period " "' General Bid Form 00300 1 INVITATION TO BID Valley Community Developoment Corporation will receive sealed bids in duplicate from a list of selected general contractors for a single firm fixed price contract for The Maples - Eleven Unit Rooming House, which is located at 16 North Maple Street in Florence, MA. Bids will be received at the office of Valley CDC , 16 Armory Street , Northampton, MA. until 2 : 00 pm on Friday, April 3 , 1992 . Bids are to be addressed to Valley CDC, The Maples Bid. This is not a public bid. Proposed forms of contract and bid documents , including project manual containing drawings and specifications , are on file at the Valley CDC. Copies of the documents may be obtained at the Valley CDC on payment of a deposit in the amount of $40 . 00 for each set of documents . Deposits shall be in the form of company or certified check and shall be made payable to the Valley CDC. Such deposit will be refunded for each set of complete documents returned in good, unused condition within five days after the bid opening . Valley CDC reserves the right to reject any and all bids or to waive any informalities in the bidding. The contract period shall be as mutually agreed. No bids shall be withdrawn for a period of 30 days subsequent to the opening of bids without the consent of the Valley CDC. Signed, John Dunne , Executive Director Valley Community Development Corporation 16 Armory Street Northampton, MA 01060 s Invitation to Bidders 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect err Division 16 NO 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 2 16123 Building Wire and Cable 4 16130 Boxes 3 16141 Wiring Devices 4 OR 16170 Grounding and Bonding 1 16180 Equipment Wiring Systems 2 16420 Service Entrance 1 No 16510 Interior Luminaires 4 16721 Fire Alarm Systems 4 16740 Telephone Systems 1 16781 Cable Television 1 err No 0 rr 4 ON TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 aw 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect Division 7 07210 Building Insulation 7 07311 Asphalt Shingles 5 07535 Modified Bitumen Sheet Roofing 3 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 4 ., 07901 Joint Sealants 7 Division 8 08110 Insulated Metal Doors 5 08211 Wood Doors 5 08610 Wood Windows 8 1° 08710 Door Hardware 11 Division 9 09250 Gypsum Drywall 6 09650 Resilient Flooring 6 09680 Carpet 6 09900 Painting 17 Division 10 •. 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 5 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 5 Division 11 11450 Residential Equipment 3 Division 12 12372 Kitchen Casework 7 Division 15 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 3 15140 Hangers and Supports 4 15260 Piping Insulation 4 15410 Plumbing Piping 8 15430 Plumbing Specialties 4 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 4 15450 Plumbing Equipment 4 15510 Hydronic Piping 4 15515 Hydronic Specialties 5 15540 HVAC Pumps 3 15545 Chemical (Water ) Treatment 3 15556 Cast Iron Boiler 5 15835 Terminal Heat Transfer Units 3 �► 15890 Ductwork 3 15973 Electronic Control System 4 15980 Instrumentation 3 , 15985 Sequence of Operation 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 "" 16 North Maple Street Renovations Edy Ambroz , Architect T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S Section Title e,w Invitation to Bidders 00300 General Bid Form AIA Form A701 - Instructions to Bidders 00700 Instructions to Bidders Supplenment AIA Form A101 - Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor AIA Form A201 - General Conditions of the Contract 00800 Supplementary General Conditions Division 1 Pages 01010 Summary of Work 2 01020 Allowances 3 01027 Application for Payment 5 01028 Labor Guidelines 30 01030 Alternates 2 01040 Project Coordination 4 01045 Cutting and Patching 4 01095 Reference Standards and Definitions 9 01200 Project Meetings 4 01300 Submittals 8 01500 Temporary Facilities 10 01600 Materials and Equipment 5 01700 Project Closeout 6 01740 Warranties and Bonds 4 Division 2 02070 Selective Demolition 5 02200 Earthwork 12 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 7 02900 Landscape Work 17 Division 3 03300 Concrete Work 17 Division 4 4 04500 Masonry Restoration 8 Division 6 06100 Rough Carpentry 12 06200 Finish Carpentry 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 C DO b�.� C 60/0 car � u U vv wr �6 4vy 4 � )eel �CCL br'7 a - See I use Otis �'�i,�vu5 r� loo 6 51 P60 G � ��U��s �'6� SC-I& 17C A -7 T11E MAPLES ELEVEN- UNIT ROOMING HOUSE 16 NORTH MAPLE STREET FLORENCE, MA OWNER: VALLEY COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION 16 ARMORY STREET NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060 413-586-5855 ARCHITECT: EDY AMBROZ, ARCHITECT PO BOX 1086 NORTHAMPTON, MA 01061 413-586-1086 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS: THERMO CONSULTING ENGINEERS 244 MAIN STREET NORTHAMPTON, MA 01060 413-586-4074 MARCH 11, 1992